JP7616680B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines that are played by players.

Conventionally, there are gaming machines that perform a special pattern lottery and perform a notification effect (variable effect) that notifies the player whether or not a jackpot has been hit (for example, Non-Patent Document 1).

"Pachinko Winning Guide", Guide Works Co., Ltd., published June 1, 2022, June 2022 issue, pages 18-21, Original Gingira Paradise

Gaming machines are expected to provide not only the enjoyment of winning gaming media (gaming balls, medals, etc.), but also the enjoyment of the game itself (presentation and gameplay). Gaming machines are also expected to provide a reasonable level of ease of understanding in terms of presentation and notifications, etc.

Therefore, one of the objectives of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that attracts players.

In order to achieve the above object, one aspect of the present invention employs the following configuration. Note that the reference symbols, explanatory text, etc. in parentheses are merely examples of correspondence with the embodiments described below to aid in understanding this aspect of the present invention, and do not in any way limit the scope of this aspect of the present invention.

A gaming machine (1) according to one aspect of the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player,
A determination means (100) for making a determination ;
a game control means (100) for controlling the progress of a game and transmitting a predetermined command based on the result of the judgment by the judgment means;
A presentation control means (400, etc.) for controlling a predetermined game presentation based on the predetermined command transmitted by the game control means;
A display means (70) capable of displaying the game performance;
An operating means (16) operated by a player,
The performance control means includes:
The display means can display a display effect (announcement effect) in which a specific image (decorative pattern) is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped .
The display means is capable of displaying an operation effect ( such as a button image) that prompts the user to operate the operation means and executing a predetermined emphasis effect (such as a button image emphasis effect) that emphasizes the operation effect ,
A first specific notification (left hit notification; FIG. 79) that notifies the game method can be executed.
A second specific notification (such as a volume/light gauge display; FIG. 70, etc.) regarding a performance effect can be executed.
The operation means is capable of executing a performance (e.g., light emission/vibration of a performance button) corresponding to the predetermined highlight performance,
When the first specific notification is executed during execution of the predetermined emphasis effect, the operation means is capable of executing an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect and is capable of restricting execution of the effect corresponding to the first specific notification (FIGS. 82 and 83).
The display effect can be set in any one of a plurality of modes (effect modes) including a first mode and a second mode (paragraph 0220, etc.).
A sound generated during execution of the predetermined emphasis effect can be made different between when the first mode is set and when the second mode is set,
The notification sound for the second specific notification may be the same when the first mode is set and when the second mode is set. (Paragraph 0580, etc.)

The present invention provides a gaming machine that attracts the interest of players.

FIG. 1 is a schematic front view showing an example of a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a first embodiment; FIG. 2 is an example of a partially enlarged view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an example of the rear face of a pachinko gaming machine 1. A block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a control device provided in a pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. 1 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the main control unit 100. An example of a detailed flowchart of a power interruption monitoring process An example of a detailed flowchart of the recovery process 1 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process performed by the main control unit 100. An example of a detailed flowchart of the start port switch processing An example of a detailed flowchart of special symbol processing FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining an example of a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining an example of a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining an example of a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining an example of a variation pattern determination table. An example of a detailed flowchart for processing large prize slots An example of a detailed flowchart for processing large prize slots An example of a detailed flowchart for processing large prize slots An example of a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process performed by the performance control unit 400 An example of a detailed flowchart showing a command reception process An example of a detailed flowchart showing a command reception process A diagram showing examples of numbers and colors of decorative patterns A diagram showing examples of decorative patterns A diagram for explaining an outline of the operation of the decorative pattern and the hold icon in the notification performance. A diagram showing an example of the relationship between the color of the reserved icon and the probability of winning A time chart for explaining the contents of the notification performance A time chart for explaining the contents of the notification performance FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the content of a notification performance; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the content of a notification performance; FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an emphasis effect; FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an emphasis effect; FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an emphasis effect; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the content of a notification performance; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the content of a notification performance; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the content of a notification performance; FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an emphasis effect; FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an emphasis effect; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the content of a notification performance; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the content of a notification performance; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the content of a notification performance; FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an emphasis effect; FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an emphasis effect; FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an emphasis effect; FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an emphasis effect; FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an emphasis effect; FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an emphasis effect; FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an emphasis effect; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the content of a notification performance; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the content of a notification performance; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the content of a notification performance; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the content of a notification performance; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the content of a notification performance; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a re-lottery effect in the notification effect according to the second embodiment; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a re-lottery effect in a notification effect. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a re-lottery effect in a notification effect. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a special symbol according to the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the characteristics of emphasis effects FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the characteristics of emphasis effects FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the characteristics of emphasis effects FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the characteristics of emphasis effects FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the characteristics of emphasis effects FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the characteristics of emphasis effects FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the characteristics of emphasis effects FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the characteristics of emphasis effects FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the characteristics of emphasis effects FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the characteristics of emphasis effects FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an emphasis effect related to an operation response effect according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an emphasis effect related to an operation response effect. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an emphasis effect related to an operation response effect. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining control related to volume adjustment and the like according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining controls related to volume adjustment, etc. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining controls related to volume adjustment, etc. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining controls related to volume adjustment, etc. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining controls related to volume adjustment, etc. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining controls related to volume adjustment, etc. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining controls related to volume adjustment, etc. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining controls related to volume adjustment, etc. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining control regarding right-hand hit notification/left-hand hit notification, etc. according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining control regarding right-hand hit notification/left-hand hit notification, etc. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining control regarding right-hand hit notification/left-hand hit notification, etc. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining control regarding right-hand hit notification/left-hand hit notification, etc. FIG. 23 is a diagram for explaining control related to left-handed hit notification and the like according to the seventh embodiment; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining control regarding left-handed hit notification, etc. FIG. 23 is a diagram for explaining control regarding turning off each device when power is cut according to the eighth embodiment; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a game flow according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining an example of background image control. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining an example of control of a background image. FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining an example of the operation of a decorative pattern according to a tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram for explaining an identification image according to the eleventh embodiment;

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate. Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be simply referred to as the gaming machine 1.

[General configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1]
The schematic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 1 to 3. Figure 1 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1. Figure 2 is an enlarged view of a first variable winning section 49 in Figure 1. Figure 3 is an example of a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is provided with an outer frame 2, a gaming board mounting frame 3 that is rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 that is rotatably supported relative to the gaming board mounting frame 3, and a gaming board 5 that has a gaming area 5a formed therein through which gaming balls (gaming media) flow down.

The outer frame 2 is made up of a rectangular base frame 2a with a central opening in the front-rear direction, to which a decorative plate 2b is attached at the lower front. The outer frame 2 is fixed to the island equipment of the amusement arcade via fastening members (e.g., nails, fasteners, etc.).

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge 6 at one horizontal end, and is supported rotatably with the first hinge 6 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated like a door relative to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, making it possible to perform maintenance on various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge 7 at one horizontal end, and is supported rotatably with the second hinge 7 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated like a door relative to the game board mounting frame 3, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed. An opening 8 (window part) that opens in the front-rear direction (front-rear direction) is formed in the approximately central part near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or an acrylic plate) is attached to close the opening 8 from the rear, making it possible to see the game area 5a through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a. Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there are provided a speaker 9, a frame lamp 10 having multiple decorative LEDs, an upper tray 11 for storing game balls such as game balls paid out based on the establishment of the awarding conditions, a lower tray (not shown) for receiving and storing game balls that do not fit in the upper tray 11 and flow into the overflow ball flow path, and a lever 13 that can be operated to launch the game balls. In addition, although not shown in FIG. 1, the game board 5 is provided with multiple board lamps 10a (see FIG. 4).

The speakers 9 are provided at two locations spaced apart on the top of the glass frame 4, and output BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to create a sound (music, voice, etc.) effect. In addition, multiple frame lamps 10 are provided around the opening 8, and lighting effects are created by changing the direction of light irradiation and the color of light emitted by each lamp (LED). In addition, the frame lamps 10 light up/blink when the glass frame 4 opens or a payout abnormality occurs in which game balls cannot be paid out from the payout device 95 (see Figure 3).

The bottom surface of the upper tray 11 slopes downward toward the lever 13 (to the right), and a ball feed solenoid (not shown) is provided at the end of the downward slope. When the game balls stored in the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid, the ball feed solenoid operates to send the game balls one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3. In addition, in the center front part of the upper tray 11, a performance button 16 and a cross key 18 are provided side by side, functioning as input devices for performing decision operations, selection operations, etc. related to various performances described below. In addition, in the right part of the upper tray 11, a loan button 20 is provided that can be used to loan game balls and return storage media such as cards that store remaining balances.

The effect button 16 allows players to perform input operations such as decision operations, and is provided with an effect button detection switch (not shown) for detecting the operation of the effect button 16, a button drive motor (not shown) for changing the effect button 16 between a normal state and a protruding state positioned higher than the normal state, a button drive device (not shown) equipped with a button vibration motor for changing the effect button 16 between the normal state and a vibration state in which the effect button 16 vibrates in a predetermined manner, and an effect button light-emitting LED (not shown) for changing the effect button 16 between an off state and a lit (or flashing) state in which the effect button 16 emits light in a predetermined manner.

The cross key 18 allows the player to perform input operations such as selection operations, and is provided with an up button, a down button, a left button, and a right button, as well as a cross key detection switch (not shown) for detecting the operation of the cross key 19.

In this embodiment, the effect button 16 is vibrated by the button drive device, but if another operating means (e.g., an effect lever that the player can operate to input) is provided in addition to the effect button 16, the effect lever may also be made to vibrate. The cross key 18 may also be made to vibrate, and furthermore, in addition to the operating means, a decorative member (e.g., a member that resembles a character) provided in a position that the player can touch may also be made to vibrate.

When the loan button 20 is operated, a ball loan machine (not shown) installed next to the gaming machine 1 deducts the remaining balance stored in the storage medium and loans out gaming balls.

Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray (not shown) is formed an overflow ball flow path (not shown) for receiving game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray. In addition, a full detection switch (not shown) is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path to detect the occurrence of a tray full error in which the lower tray becomes full of game balls, and while the full detection switch detects that the lower tray is full, the payout device 95 (see Figure 3) stops paying out game balls.

The lever 13 is provided with a rotatable launch handle 15, a touch sensor (not shown) that detects when the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, and a launch volume (not shown) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the launch handle 15, thereby changing the launch speed of the game balls. When the touch sensor detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, a ball feed solenoid (not shown) is activated and the game balls are sent out one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 is provided with a game board mounting portion (not shown) for mounting the game board 5, a launching device 26 for launching game balls toward the game area 5a, a locking mechanism 27 for locking the game board mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 in a closed state, and an opening detection switch (not shown) for detecting the opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4.

The game board mounting section is formed in a recessed chamber shape that opens to the front at approximately the center near the top of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. At the back of the recessed chamber of the game board mounting section, an opening that opens in the front-to-rear direction is provided, and various devices and the like provided on the back side of the game board 5 face the rear of the gaming machine 1 through this opening.

The launching device 26 is provided with a launching member for launching game balls, a launching solenoid (not shown) for driving the launching member, a launching rail that slopes upward from the launching member toward the lower left end of the game board, and a stopper that stops the game ball at the launch position, which is the lower end of the slope of the launching rail. The game ball sent to the launch position by the ball-feeding solenoid is launched toward the game area 5a by the operation of the launching member.

The locking mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting part, and the front end of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. When a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the game board mounting frame 3 is unlocked and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

Curved inner and outer rails 35 and 36 are provided near the outer edge of the game board 5, and a game area 5a into which game balls can flow is formed in the area surrounded by the inner and outer rails 35 and 36. A launched ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner and outer rails 35 and 36, which guides game balls launched by the launching device 26 to the upstream part of the game area 5a. An outlet 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the game area 5a to guide the game balls that have flowed down outside the game area (to the collection part of the game board mounting frame 3). A decorative frame 40 (center case) is provided in the approximate center of the play area 5a to prevent game balls from entering the area. The decorative frame 40 divides the play area 5a into a left play area where game balls shot with a first shooting strength flow down and a right play area where game balls shot with a second shooting strength that is stronger than the first shooting strength flow down, and the left play area and the right play area are connected below the decorative frame 40.

At the left side of the decorative frame 40, a warp device 41 is provided to introduce the game balls flowing down the left game area into the interior of the decorative frame 40, and at the bottom of the decorative frame 40, a stage section 42 is provided to allow the game balls guided into the interior of the decorative frame 40 by the warp device 41 to flow down below the decorative frame 40. In addition, at the lower left side of the decorative frame 40, three normal winning openings (general winning openings) 43 are provided through which game balls can always win (enter), and at the lower right side of the decorative frame 40, one normal winning opening 43 through which game balls can always win (enter). When a game ball that has won (entered) the normal winning opening 43 is detected by the normal winning opening switch 43a (see FIG. 4) (awarding condition is established), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, five balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarding of prize value).

Below the stage section 42 is a first start hole 45 (a start winning area for a first special symbol) where game balls can always enter (enter), and when a game ball that has entered (entered) the first start hole 45 is detected by the first start hole switch 45a (awarding conditions are met), a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., three balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarding prize value). In addition, the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not a special game (jackpot game) will be played is granted.

A variable starting section 46 is provided below the decorative frame 40 and diagonally below and to the right of the first starting hole 45. This variable starting section 46 can be switched from a closed state, in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter, to an open state, in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter, based on the satisfaction of certain conditions. The variable starting section 46 has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in Figure 1) to form a flow path for the game ball, and is provided with an opening/closing member 48 that can move in the front-to-back direction, a second starting port 47 (starting winning area for the second special pattern) that opens upward directly below the opening/closing member 48, a second starting port switch 47a (see Figure 4) that detects a game ball that has won (entered) the second starting port 47, and a second starting port opening/closing section 48b (solenoid) that converts the second starting port 47 to a closed state by moving the second starting port opening/closing member 48 forward (winning restriction position) and converts the second starting port 47 to an open state by moving the second starting port opening/closing member 48 backward (winning allowable position). When a game ball enters the second start hole 47 and is detected by the second start hole switch 47a (a prize condition is met), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, two balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (a prize value is awarded). In addition, the right to make a jackpot determination (lottery) to determine whether or not a special game (jackpot game) will be played is granted.

In the right-side game area to the right of the decorative frame 40, a gate 44 (normal pattern start area) through which game balls can always pass is provided, and when a game ball that has passed through the gate 44 is detected by the gate switch 44a, no prize balls are awarded, but a normal pattern lottery is run to open the second start port 47.

Below the gate 44 is a first variable winning section 49 (first variable winning device) that can be converted from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win (enter the prize) to an open state in which it is possible or easy to win based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a jackpot determination has determined that a jackpot has occurred).

The first variable winning section 49 has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) to form a flow path for the game balls, and is provided with an opening/closing member 51 that can move in the front-to-back direction, a first large winning opening 50 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the opening/closing member 51, a first large winning opening switch 50a that detects game balls that have won (entered) the first large winning opening 50, and a first large winning opening opening opening/closing section 51b (see Figure 4) for changing the first large winning opening 50 to a closed state by moving the opening/closing member 51 forward (winning restriction position) and for changing the first large winning opening 50 to an open state by moving the opening/closing member 51 backward (winning permitted position). Then, when the opening/closing member 51 moves backward during a jackpot game and the first large prize opening 50 changes from a closed state to an open state, the game balls that have flowed down the top surface of the opening/closing member 51 or that have reached the first large prize opening 50 enter the first large prize opening 50 and are detected by the first large prize opening switch 50a, and a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 95 (see Figure 3) to the upper tray 11.

2, the first variable winning section 49 is translucent so that the inside can be seen, and is provided with a guide member 220, an opening/closing member 221, a guide member 222, and an outlet 223 inside. While the guide members 220 and 222 are fixed, the opening/closing member 221 can be moved in the front-to-back direction (toward the depth of the player) by a specific area opening/closing section 150 (not shown in FIG. 2). A specific area 224 is provided directly below the opening/closing member 221, and a game ball passing through the specific area 224 is detected by a specific area switch 151 (not shown in FIG. 2). In FIG. 2, a "V" mark is drawn in the specific area 224 so that it can be seen by the player. When the opening/closing member 221 is in a closed state in which it has moved forward, a game ball that has won the first large winning opening 50 and has been detected by the first large winning opening switch 50a (not shown in FIG. 2) flows down by the guide member 220, the opening/closing member 221, and the guide member 222, and enters the discharge opening 223 without passing through the specific area 224. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 221 is in an open state in which it has moved backward, a game ball that has won the first large winning opening 50 and has been detected by the first large winning opening switch 50a (not shown in FIG. 2) passes through the specific area 224 and then enters the discharge opening 223 with a high probability. As will be described later, when a small win is won in the special pattern lottery, a small win game is played, the opening/closing member 51 and the opening/closing member 221 are opened, and the game ball can pass through the specific area 224. When the game ball passes through the specific area 224 during a small win game, a big win (a second type of big win) occurs and a big win game is played. The big win of the special symbol lottery is a first type of big win.

Below the first variable winning section 49, there is a second variable winning section 55 that can be switched from a closed state, in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win (enter the prize), to an open state, in which it is possible or easy to win, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a jackpot being determined to have occurred).

The second variable winning section 55 (second variable winning device) has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in the figure) to form a flow path for the game balls, and is provided with an opening/closing member 57 that can move in the front-to-back direction, a second large winning opening 56 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the opening/closing member 57, a second large winning opening switch 56a that detects game balls that have won (entered) the second large winning opening 56, and a second large winning opening opening opening/closing section 57b (solenoid) that converts the second large winning opening 56 to a closed state by moving the opening/closing member 57 forward (winning restriction position) and changes the second large winning opening 56 to an open state by moving the opening/closing member 57 backward (winning permitted position). Then, when the opening/closing member 57 moves backward during jackpot play and the second large prize opening 56 changes from a closed state to an open state, the game balls that have flowed down the top surface of the opening/closing member 57 or that have reached the second large prize opening 56 enter the second large prize opening 56 and are detected by the second large prize opening switch 56a, and a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see Figure 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

A game ball launched into the left-hand game area will either flow directly down along the outer edge of the decorative frame 40, or flow into the warp device 41 and then flow down through the stage section 42, and enter one of the three normal winning holes 43 or the first starting hole 45 located below the decorative frame 40, or flow into the out hole 39. Therefore, the game ball will not enter (pass through) the gate 44, normal winning hole 43, first variable winning section 49 (first large winning hole 50), or second variable winning section 55 (second large winning hole 56) located in the right-hand game area. In addition, a game ball launched into the right-side game area flows down through the upstream flow path 91a and enters one of the normal winning openings 43, the variable starting section 46 (second starting opening 47), the first variable winning opening 49 (first large winning opening 50), and the second variable winning opening 55 (second large winning opening 56) provided in the right-side game area, or flows into the outlet 39. Therefore, the game ball will not enter the normal winning opening 43 or the first starting opening 45 provided in the left-side game area.

On the back side of the game board 5, there is an out-ball flow path that receives and collects out-balls, which include game balls that have won in the normal winning port 43, the first starting port 45, the second starting port 47, the first large winning port 50, and the second large winning port 56, as well as game balls that have flowed into the outlet 39, and allows them to flow down, and an out-ball switch (not shown) is provided at the most downstream part of the out-ball flow path. Game balls detected by the out-ball switch are discharged from the outlet on the back side of the game machine 1 to the outside of the game machine 1 (island equipment).

Outside the play area 5a, there is provided a pattern display device consisting of a first special pattern display 60, a second special pattern display 61, and a normal pattern display 62, a reserved display device consisting of a first special pattern reserved display 63, a second special pattern reserved display 64, and a normal pattern reserved display 65, and a main information display 59 consisting of a round number display 66, a right hit display 67, and a status confirmation display 68. This main information display 59 is basically composed of LEDs, and is designed to be dynamically lit.

The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a jackpot determination for a first special symbol (the result of a special symbol lottery) made based on the entry (entry) of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 45. The second special symbol display 61 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a jackpot determination for a second special symbol (the result of a special symbol lottery) made based on the entry (entry) of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 47. The normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a hit determination for a normal symbol (the result of a normal symbol lottery) made based on the passage (entry) of a gaming ball into the gate 44. The jackpot determination is to obtain determination information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination, random number for special symbol variation pattern determination, etc.) when a game ball enters the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47, and to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game based on the obtained determination information. Then, when a jackpot determination is made based on the game ball entering the first start hole 45, the first special symbol display 60 displays the variation of the first special symbol, and after a predetermined time has passed, the first special symbol is displayed as a stationary display to notify the judgment result. Also, when a jackpot determination is made based on the game ball entering the second start hole 47, the second special symbol display 61 displays the variation of the second special symbol, and after a predetermined time has passed, the second special symbol is displayed as a stationary display to notify the judgment result.

When displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner, the LED of the normal symbol display 62 flashes at a predetermined interval or sequence. When displaying the normal symbol in a static manner, the LED lights up in a manner that notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery.

The first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can be configured with a seven-segment LED. For example, if the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot, numbers such as "3" or "7" can be displayed as static numbers, and if a jackpot is determined to be a miss, a static "-" can be displayed, and during the varying display, the light can be turned off and the "-" can be displayed alternately.

The first special symbol reserved indicator 63 is for displaying the first reserved number (U1), which is the number of judgment information (first reserved) stored when a game ball enters (enters) the first starting hole 45, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of first reserved. Note that, although a maximum of four first reserved items are stored, the number may be less than or more than four. The second special symbol reserved indicator 64 is for displaying the second reserved number (U2), which is the number of judgment information (second reserved) stored when a game ball enters (enters) the second starting hole 47, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of second reserved. Note that, although a maximum of four second reserved items are stored, the number may be less than or more than four, or the second reserved items may not be stored. The regular symbol reserve indicator 65 is for displaying the regular symbol reserve number, which is the number of judgment information (regular symbol reserve) stored when a game ball enters (passes) the gate 44, and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of regular symbol reserves. Note that up to four regular symbol reserves can be stored, but the number may be less than or more than four, or no regular symbol reserves may be stored.

The round number display 66 is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game) occurs, and starts lighting the LEDs in a predetermined manner indicating the number of rounds when a jackpot game starts, keeps the LEDs lit during the jackpot game, and turns off the LEDs when the jackpot game ends. For example, if the jackpot game has four rounds, only the leftmost LED lights up, and if the jackpot game has ten rounds, all LEDs light up.

The right-hit indicator 67 is for displaying a right-hit display that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right-side play area (so-called right hit) during a jackpot game or during a time-saving game state, and the LED lights up during a jackpot game or during a time-saving game state, etc.

The status confirmation indicator 68 indicates that the gaming machine 1 is set to a setting change mode for changing the set value of the probability of winning the special symbol lottery, or a setting confirmation mode for confirming the set value. In the gaming machine 1, the gaming establishment can set the probability of winning the special symbol lottery to one of a number of winning probabilities as the set value. When the gaming machine 1 enters the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the LED starts to light up, and when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends, the LED goes out. In this way, since the status confirmation indicator 68 is provided on the front (surface) of the gaming machine, the gaming establishment can easily check whether the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set. The status confirmation indicator 68 may be provided on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1, or may be provided in other locations.

Inside the play area 5a, there is a sub-information display 80 consisting of a sub-first change indicator 81, a sub-second change indicator 82, a sub-first hold indicator 83, a sub-second hold indicator 84, a sub-regular change indicator 85, a sub-regular hold indicator 86, and a sub-right hit indicator 87. The sub-information display 80 is basically composed of LEDs, and is designed to be dynamically lit. Note that the sub-information display 80 does not have an indicator such as the above-mentioned status confirmation indicator 68 that indicates that it is set to a setting change mode or setting confirmation mode.

The sub-first variation indicator 81 is for displaying (informing) whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed, and the sub-second variation indicator 82 is for displaying (informing) whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed, and each is composed of one LED. When the corresponding special symbol starts to be displayed, the LED flashes at a predetermined cycle (1 second) (0.5 seconds on → 0.5 seconds off), and lights up when the corresponding special symbol is displayed stationary. The sub-first variation indicator 81 or the sub-second variation indicator 82 may be configured to notify the result of the jackpot determination for the special symbol. In this case, the LED may be configured to light up in the event of a jackpot and to turn off in the event of a miss.

The sub-first hold indicator 83 is for displaying the number of first hold information items (first hold number), and the sub-second hold indicator 84 is for displaying the number of second hold information items (second hold number), and each is composed of two LEDs. When the hold number is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the hold number is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off, when the hold number is "2", the left LED is turned on, when the hold number is "3", the left LED is blinking and the right LED is turned on, and when the hold number is "4", the left and right LEDs are blinking.

The sub-regular pattern variation indicator 85 is for displaying (informing) the result of the regular pattern lottery, and is composed of one LED. When the regular pattern variation display starts, the LED flashes (displays variation) at a specified interval. When the regular pattern is displayed stationary, a display showing the result of the winning lottery (lights up if there is a win, and goes off if there is a loss) is displayed stationary. Note that the sub-regular pattern variation indicator 85 may be configured to flash while the regular pattern is being displayed stationary, and to light up or go off when the regular pattern is displayed stationary, so that it is possible to know whether or not the regular pattern variation display is in progress.

The sub-regular map reserve indicator 86 is used to display the number of reserved regular map memories (regular map reserve number) and is composed of two LEDs. When the regular map reserve number is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the regular map reserve number is "1", the left LED is lit and the right LED is turned off, when the regular map reserve number is "2", the left LED flashes and the right LED is lit, and when the regular map reserve number is "4", the left and right LEDs flash.

The sub right-hit indicator 87 is intended to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the right area of the play area 5a (so-called right hit), and is composed of one LED. The LED lights up during jackpot play and during time-saving play, and is turned off in other play states.

A main image display unit 70 consisting of a liquid crystal display is provided at the back of the performance space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40, and a sub-image display unit 71 consisting of a liquid crystal display smaller in size than the main image display unit 70 is provided at the bottom of the performance space 40a and in front of the main image display unit 70. A movable prop 733 for executing action and lamp performances is provided at the top of the performance space 40a. Note that the main image display unit 70 and the sub-image display unit 71 are sometimes collectively referred to as the image display unit.

The main image display unit 70 and the sub-image display unit 71 perform various effects depending on the progress of the game. The effects include a customer waiting demo effect performed when the variable display of the special symbols is not being executed, a notification effect (variation effect) accompanied by a variable display of a decorative symbol (performance symbol) performed when the variable display of the special symbols is being executed, and a jackpot game effect performed during the execution of a jackpot game. In addition, the sub-image display unit 71 can perform a movement effect by moving with a solenoid or motor while the variable effect is being executed in the main image display unit 70. Note that the sub-image display unit 71 does not necessarily have to be provided, and for example, a movable role that performs operations such as lamp illumination and movement may be provided at the position where the sub-image display unit 71 is provided.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, there are a payout device 95 for paying out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball loans), a game ball storage section 96 for storing game balls supplied from island equipment and the like and supplying them to the payout device 95, a main control device 110A incorporating a main control board constituting the main control section 100, a payout control device 120A incorporating a payout control board constituting the payout control section 300 and the launch control section 200, a performance control device 130A incorporating a performance control board constituting the performance control section 400, the image and sound control section 500 and the lamp control section 600, a power supply unit 160A incorporating a power supply board, and a game information output terminal board 90 for outputting information related to the game to the outside of the game machine (information collection device such as a hall computer).

In addition, a cover member 23 with an opening and closing door is provided, which opens and closes in the left and right directions on the left and right sides around a rotation axis set on one side so as to cover the upper part of the main control device and the entire performance control device from the rear, and the performance control device 130A is provided with a changeover switch 22 for switching adjustment modes related to the volume of the performance sounds etc. output from the speaker 9 and the light intensity of the display device (main image display unit, sub image display unit) and various lighting devices (frame lamp 10, etc.) so as to be covered by the cover member 23. In addition, a rear key 170 (see FIG. 4), not shown in FIG. 3, is provided near the changeover switch 22. When the rear key 170 is in the adjustment mode for adjusting the volume by the changeover switch 22, the volume output from the speaker 9 can be adjusted from the back of the game board 5 by a store employee or the like. In addition, when the rear key 170 is in an adjustment mode in which the light intensity is adjusted by the changeover switch 22, the light intensity of various lighting devices (e.g., frame lamp 10) can be adjusted (set to either normal light intensity or a dimmer light intensity) from the back side of the game board 5 by a store clerk or the like.

On the front side of the main control board, there are mounted a main control unit 100 consisting of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, an RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal to clear the memory contents of the RAM 103 of the main control unit 100 or to update a setting value that sets the degree of advantage of the game (the probability of winning the special symbol lottery), a setting key switch 112a for inputting a signal to switch to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values that enable the actual performance of the gaming machine to be grasped, and other electronic components.

The information display 113 is composed of four seven-segment displays aligned horizontally. The two seven-segment displays from the left form an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type of performance information (data type), and the two seven-segment displays from the right form a numeric segment for displaying numerical information indicating setting values and numerical values of the performance information.

[Configuration of the control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1]
Next, a control device for controlling operations and processing signals in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the main configuration of the control device provided in the gaming machine 1.

In FIG. 4, the control device of the gaming machine 1 includes a main control unit 100, a launch control unit 200, a payout control unit 300, a performance control unit 400, an image and sound control unit 500, and a lamp control unit 600.

The main control unit 100 comprises a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 101, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 102, and a RAM (Random Access Memory) 103. The CPU 101 performs calculations when carrying out various controls related to the number of prize balls to be paid out, such as internal lotteries and winning determinations. The ROM 102 stores programs executed by the CPU 101, various data, etc. The RAM 103 is used as a working memory for the CPU 101, etc. The main functions of the main control unit 100 are described below.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, the main control unit 100 performs a special pattern lottery (jackpot lottery) and sends the determination result data indicating whether or not the special pattern lottery has been won to the performance control unit 400.

The main control unit 100 controls the open time for which the opening/closing member 48 of the variable start unit 46 is in the open state, the number of times the opening/closing member 48 opens and closes, and the time interval for opening and closing the opening/closing member 48. The main control unit 100 also manages the number of times that the special pattern lottery is pending when the gaming ball enters the first start port 45, the number of times that the special pattern lottery is pending when the gaming ball enters the second start port 47, and the number of times that the normal pattern lottery is pending when the gaming ball passes through the gate 44, and sends data related to these pending numbers to the performance control unit 400.

The main control unit 100 controls the opening and closing of the large prize openings (first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) depending on the result of the special pattern lottery (winning a big prize or a small prize). For example, the main control unit 100 controls the round in which the large prize opening (first large prize opening 50 or second large prize opening 56) is open to be repeated a predetermined number of times (e.g., 15 times) until a predetermined condition (e.g., 29.5 seconds have passed or 10 game balls have been won) is met. The main control unit 100 also controls the time interval for opening and closing the large prize openings (first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56).

When a small prize is won in the special pattern lottery, the main control unit 100 changes the opening/closing member 221 inside the first variable prize section 49 (the first large prize opening 50 that is opened due to the small prize win) from a closed state to an open state, allowing the game ball to pass through the specific area 224 (see Figure 2). In this case, when the game ball passes through the specific area 224, the main control unit 100 generates a big prize.

The main control unit 100 changes the game state according to the progress of the game, and also changes the execution interval of the special pattern lottery (which can be said to be the time from when the special pattern is displayed variably on the main information display 59 to when it is displayed stationary), the opening and closing operation of the variable start unit 46, etc. according to the progress of the game.

When a game ball enters the first start gate 45, the second start gate 47, the large prize gate (first large prize gate 50, second large prize gate 56), and the normal prize gate 43, the main control unit 100 instructs the payout control unit 300 to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls per game ball according to the location where the game ball entered. Even if the main control unit 100 detects that a game ball has passed through the gate 44, it does not instruct the payout control unit 300 to pay out prize balls linked to that. When the payout control unit 300 pays out prize balls in accordance with the instruction of the main control unit 100, information regarding the number of prize balls paid out from the payout control unit 300 is sent to the main control unit 100. The main control unit 100 then manages the number of prize balls paid out based on the information obtained from the payout control unit 300.

The main control unit 100 displays (notifies) the player of the results of the special symbol lottery, the results of the normal symbol lottery, the number of reserved symbols for the special symbol lottery, the number of reserved symbols for the normal symbol lottery, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, etc. The main control unit 100 also displays performance information that allows the actual performance of the gaming machine to be understood, and a setting value that sets the advantageous degree of the game (the probability of winning the special symbol lottery) on the surface of the main control board. The main control unit 100 also clears the contents stored in the RAM 103 in response to the operation of the store clerk, etc., and also sets one of a number of predetermined fixed values as the above-mentioned setting value. The main control unit 100 also transitions to a setting change mode in which the above-mentioned setting value can be changed, or a setting confirmation mode in which the setting status of the above-mentioned setting value can be confirmed, in response to the operation of the store clerk, etc. The main control unit 100 also outputs information related to the game to the outside of the gaming machine (an information collection device such as a hall computer).

To realize the above-mentioned functions, the main control unit 100 is connected to the first start port switch 45a, the second start port switch 47a, the second start port opening/closing unit 48b, the gate switch 44a, the first large prize port switch 50a, the second large prize port switch 56a, the first large prize port opening/closing unit 51b, the second large prize port opening/closing unit 57b, the specific area switch 151, the specific area opening/closing unit 150, the normal prize port switch 43a, the main information display 59 (see Figure 1), the information display 113, the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, and the game information output terminal board 90.

The first start port switch 45a sends a signal to the main control unit 100 in response to the entry of a game ball into the first start port 45. The second start port switch 47a sends a signal to the main control unit 100 in response to the entry of a game ball into the second start port 47. The second start port opening/closing unit 48b opens and closes the opening/closing member 48 of the variable start unit 46 in response to a control signal sent from the main control unit 100. The gate switch 44a sends a signal to the main control unit 100 in response to the passage of a game ball through the gate 44. The first large prize port switch 50a sends a signal to the main control unit 100 in response to the entry of a game ball into the first large prize port 50. The first large prize port opening/closing unit 51b opens and closes the first large prize port 50 in response to a control signal sent from the main control unit 100. The second large prize opening switch 56a sends a signal to the main control unit 100 in response to the game ball winning the second large prize opening 56. The second large prize opening opening opening unit 57b opens and closes the second large prize opening 56 in response to a control signal sent from the main control unit 100. The specific area switch 151 sends a signal to the main control unit 100 in response to the game ball passing through the specific area 224 (see FIG. 2). The specific area opening and closing unit 150 opens and closes the specific area 224 (opening and closing member 221) in response to a control signal sent from the main control unit 100. The normal prize opening switch 43a sends a signal to the main control unit 100 in response to the game ball winning the normal prize opening 43. The main information display 59 displays (notifies) the results of the special symbol lottery, the results of the normal symbol lottery, the number of reserved special symbol lotteries, the number of reserved normal symbol lotteries, the number of rounds of the big win game, etc., in response to a control signal sent from the main control unit 100. The information display 113 displays (on the surface of the main control board) performance information that allows the actual performance of the gaming machine to be grasped and a setting value that sets the advantageous degree of the game (the probability of winning the special symbol lottery) in response to a control signal sent from the main control unit 100. The RWM clear switch 113a sends a signal to the main control unit 100 to clear the memory contents of the RAM 103 and a signal to set the above-mentioned setting value in response to the operation of a store clerk or the like. The setting key switch 112a sends a signal to the main control unit 100 to switch to a setting change mode in which the above-mentioned setting value can be changed, or a setting confirmation mode in which the setting status of the above-mentioned setting value can be confirmed. The game information output terminal board 90 outputs information about the game to an external device (such as a hall computer) outside the gaming machine 1.

The launch control unit 200 includes a CPU 201, a ROM 202, and a RAM 203. The CPU 201 performs calculations when carrying out various controls related to the launch device 26. The ROM 202 stores programs executed by the CPU 201, various data, etc. The RAM 203 is used as a working memory for the CPU 201, etc.

When the lever 13 is in a neutral position, it does not output a signal and is in a firing stop state. When the player rotates the lever 13 clockwise, it outputs a signal corresponding to the rotation angle to the firing control unit 200 as a ball firing command signal. The firing control unit 200 controls the firing operation of the firing device 26 based on the ball firing command signal. For example, the firing control unit 200 controls the operation of the firing device 26 so that the speed at which the game ball is fired increases as the rotation angle of the lever 13 increases. When a signal is output indicating that a stop button (not shown) provided on the lever 13 has been pressed, the firing control unit 200 stops the operation of the firing device 26 to fire the game ball.

The payout control unit 300 includes a CPU 301, a ROM 302, and a RAM 303. The CPU 301 performs calculations to control the payout of balls. The ROM 302 stores programs executed by the CPU 301, various data, and the like. The RAM 303 is used as a working memory for the CPU 301, and the like.

The payout control unit 300 controls the payout of the payout balls based on the command sent from the main control unit 100. Specifically, the payout control unit 300 receives a command from the main control unit 100 to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the location where the game ball landed. Then, the payout control unit 300 controls the payout device 95 to pay out the number of prize balls specified in the command.

The performance control unit 400 comprises a CPU 401, a ROM 402, a RAM 403, and an RTC (real-time clock) 404. The performance control unit 400 is also connected to the cross key 18 operated by the player, and the performance control unit 400 acquires operation data output from the cross key 18 in response to the player's operation of the cross key 18. The performance control unit 400 also acquires operation data output from the performance button 16 via the lamp control unit 600. The CPU 401 performs calculation processing when controlling the performance. The ROM 402 stores programs executed by the CPU 401, various data, etc. The RAM 403 is used as a working memory for the CPU 401, etc. The RTC 404 measures the current date and time.

The performance control unit 400 sets the performance content based on data indicating the special symbol lottery results, etc., sent from the main control unit 100. In addition, when the player presses the performance button 16 or the cross key 18, the performance control unit 400 may set the performance content according to the operation input or detection result.

The image and audio control unit 500 includes a CPU 501, a ROM 502, and a RAM 503. The CPU 501 performs calculations to control the images and audio that represent the performance content. The ROM 502 stores programs executed by the CPU 501, various data, etc. The RAM 503 is used as a working memory for the CPU 501, etc.

Based on the command sent from the performance control unit 400, the image and sound control unit 500 controls the image displayed on the image display unit (main image display unit 70, sub image display unit 71) and the sound output from the speaker 9. Specifically, the ROM 502 of the image and sound control unit 500 stores image data for displaying on the image display unit, such as decorative pattern images for announcing the results of the special pattern lottery, images of characters and items for displaying preview performances and pre-read preview performances, a hold icon indicating that the special pattern lottery is on hold, and various background images. In addition, the ROM 502 of the image and sound control unit 500 stores various sound data such as music and sound to be output from the speaker 9 in conjunction with the image displayed on the image display unit or independently of the image displayed. The CPU 501 of the image and sound control unit 500 selects and reads out the image and sound data corresponding to the command sent from the performance control unit 400 from the image and sound data stored in the ROM 502. The CPU 501 then uses the read image data to perform image processing for displaying background images, decorative pattern images, characters/items, and the like, and performs various performance displays corresponding to commands sent from the performance control unit 400. The CPU 501 then displays an image indicated by the image-processed image data on the image display unit. The CPU 501 also performs audio processing using the read audio data, and outputs audio indicated by the audio-processed audio data from the speaker 9. The image and audio control unit 500 also adjusts the volume output from the speaker 9 in response to a signal generated when the rear key 170 is operated.

The lamp control unit 600 includes a CPU 601, a ROM 602, and a RAM 603. The CPU 601 performs calculations when controlling the board lamp 10a, the frame lamp 10, the performance button 16, the movable role object 73, and the sub information display 80. The ROM 602 stores programs executed by the CPU 601, various data, etc. The RAM 603 is used as a working memory for the CPU 601, etc.

The lamp control unit 600 controls the lighting/flashing and light color of the board lamp 10a, the frame lamp 10, the performance button 16, and the movable role object 73 based on the command sent from the performance control unit 400. The lamp control unit 600 also controls the operation of the performance button 16 and the movable role object 73 based on the command sent from the performance control unit 400. Specifically, the ROM 602 of the lamp control unit 600 stores lighting/flashing pattern data and light color pattern data (light emission pattern data) of the board lamp 10a etc. according to the performance content set by the performance control unit 400. The CPU 601 selects and reads out the light emission pattern data corresponding to the command sent from the performance control unit 400 from the light emission pattern data stored in the ROM 602. Then, the CPU 601 controls the light emission of the board lamp 10a etc. based on the read light emission pattern data. The ROM 602 also stores operation pattern data of the performance button 16 and the movable role object 73 according to the performance content set by the performance control unit 400. The CPU 601 selects and reads out the operation pattern data stored in the ROM 602 that corresponds to the command sent from the performance control unit 400. The CPU 601 then controls the operation of the performance button 16 and the movable role object 73 based on the read operation pattern data. The lamp control unit 600 also controls the display (lighting, etc.) of the sub-performance display 80 based on the command sent from the performance control unit 400.

In addition, the lamp control unit 600 adjusts the light intensity of the lamps (LEDs) of the board lamp 10a, frame lamp 10, performance button 16, and movable prop 73 in response to a signal generated when the rear key 170 is operated.

The lamp control unit 600 is also connected to the performance button 16 that is operated by the player, and the lamp control unit 600 acquires operation data output from the performance button 16 in response to the player's operation of the performance button 16, and transmits the operation data to the performance control unit 400.

The performance control unit 400 notifies the image and audio control unit 500 of the operation status of the performance button 16 and the cross key 18 based on the operation data of the performance button 16 transmitted from the lamp control unit 600 and the operation data output from the cross key 18. Here, the operation status of the performance button 16 and the cross key 18 is information including whether or not an operation is being performed and what operation is being performed (for example, a long press of the performance button 16 or a press of the left key of the cross key 18). Therefore, for example, when the performance button 16 is operated by a player, the operation status of the performance button 16 detected by the lamp control unit 600 is transmitted to the image and audio control unit 500 via the performance control unit 400. Therefore, the image and audio control unit 500 can change the performance content, etc. based on the operation status of the performance button 16, etc. transmitted from the performance control unit 400. In addition, the performance control unit 400 can send a command to the lamp control unit 600 according to the operation data of the performance button 16 transmitted from the lamp control unit 600 to operate the movable role object 73 and execute the movable role object performance.

[Outline of the gaming state in this embodiment]
Next, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. The gaming states of the gaming machine 1 include at least a low probability state, a time-saving state, and a non-time-saving state. The low probability state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is set to a normal low probability (e.g., 1/300). Note that the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment does not have a high probability state in which the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is set to a higher probability (e.g., 1/50) than the low probability state.

The non-time-saving state is a game state in which the execution time of the special symbol lottery is the normal time, the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery is the normal low probability (e.g. 1/10), and even if the normal symbol lottery is won, the variable starting part 46 is controlled to open only for a short time (e.g. once every 0.10 seconds). For this reason, the non-time-saving state is a game state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 47.

The time-saving state is a game state in which the execution time of the special symbol lottery is shorter than in the non-time-saving state, the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery is higher (e.g., 10/10) than in the non-electric support state, and when the normal symbol lottery is won, the variable start unit 46 is controlled to be opened for a long time (e.g., three times for 2.00 seconds). Therefore, the time-saving state is a game state in which the variable start unit 46 is frequently opened for a long time, making it easier for game balls to frequently enter the second start hole 47 (win a prize), and a large number of special symbol lotteries can be executed in a short time while reducing the consumption of game balls compared to the non-time-saving state.

In this embodiment, a game state controlled to a low probability state and a non-time-saving state is called a low probability non-time-saving game state (sometimes called a "normal game state"), and a game state controlled to a low probability state and a time-saving state is called a low probability time-saving game state (sometimes called a "time-saving game state"). Also, as described above, this embodiment does not provide a high probability state, so it is not controlled to a high probability time-saving game state (probability variable game state) that is controlled to a high probability state and a time-saving state. Note that, although control is performed in the normal game state during jackpot play, since a jackpot play is being executed, it may be considered that control is performed in the jackpot game state during jackpot play.

Next, the above-mentioned "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 5. In conventional gaming machines, the transition from the "low-probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state)" to the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" is typically made via the routes (a) and (d) in FIG. 5. In this embodiment, in addition to the conventional routes (a) and (d), a transition route to the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" is provided. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5 (b), when a predetermined condition is met in the normal game state, the state transitions to the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" without going through a jackpot game.

One example of "the fulfillment of a predetermined condition" is when the number of times the variable display of the special symbol has been executed from the starting point reaches N times. For example, an area is provided in RAM 103 that counts and stores the number of times the variable display of the special symbol has been executed in the "low probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state)", and when the number of times counted and stored in that area reaches N times, a transition is made from the "low probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state)" to the "low probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)".

"N times" can be set to any number of times for each setting value that sets the winning probability of the special symbol lottery. For example, if the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is "1/199", N times can be set to about "500", and if the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is "1/319", N times can be set to about "900".

An example of the "starting point" is the state where the RWM clear switch 111a is operated to clear the stored information in the RAM 103 (information such as the number of times the special symbol lottery has been performed and the number of jackpots). Another example is the end of the "low probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)", that is, the state (E) in FIG. 5.

The upper limit number of times for the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" is, for example, 100 times when transitioning via (d) in FIG. 5. On the other hand, the upper limit number of times for the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" is, for example, 1000 times when transitioning via (b) in FIG. 5. In other words, the upper limit number of times for the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" is higher when transitioning via the satisfaction of a predetermined condition without playing a jackpot game than when transitioning via playing a jackpot game.

This provides players with information to help them decide whether or not to play, and reduces the number of players who play randomly. For example, if N is about 900 times, it is possible to provide relief measures to players who have not won a jackpot for a long time, which leads to preventing players from quitting gaming. The number of N times can be easily understood by players through magazines, etc. In addition, when a predetermined condition is met to transition to a "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)," the upper limit number of times for the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" is higher than when transitioning to a "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" via a jackpot game, so players are encouraged to actively try playing the "low-probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state)," which improves the operation of the gaming machine.

When a "predetermined condition is met," the number of spins up to "N times" may be actively notified. For example, a notification (display) such as "XX spins left to enter △△ state!" may be made on the main image display unit 70, etc. On the other hand, a positive notification may not be made and the display may merely be a suggestion. For example, when the number of spins approaches "N times," a special presentation (background, mode) may be used to suggest that "N times" is approaching.

Next, we will explain the processing flow executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1.

[Main Processing by Main Control Unit 100]
First, the main processing executed by the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 6. Note that this main processing starts when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, and is executed continuously while the main control unit 100 is operating.

In step S901 of FIG. 6, the CPU 101 first waits for, for example, 2000 ms, and then the process moves to step S902. Although not shown, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the CPU 401 of the performance control unit 400 is ready to receive a signal from the main control unit 100 without performing standby processing. In other words, the CPU 401 of the performance control unit 400 is ready to start processing before the CPU 101 of the main control unit 100.

In step S902, the CPU 101 is able to access the RAM 103, and processing proceeds to step S903.

In step S903, the CPU 101 determines whether the RAM clear switch 111a is "ON." If the determination in step S903 is YES, the process proceeds to step S904, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S907.

In step S904, the CPU 101 clears the RAM. Since clearing the RAM is a known technique and will not be described in detail, the process resets various pieces of information stored in the RAM 103 (such as information indicating the game status and information on the number of times the special symbol lottery has been executed) to a predetermined initial state. After that, the process proceeds to step S905.

In step S905, the CPU 101 sets the working area for when the RAM is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S906.

In step S906, the CPU 101 performs initial settings for the peripheral parts. Here, the peripheral parts are the performance control unit 400, the payout control unit 300, etc. The initial settings for the peripheral parts are performed by sending an initial setting command to each control unit to instruct it to perform the initial settings. After that, the process proceeds to step S910.

In step S907, CPU 101 determines whether the backup flag is "ON." The backup flag is a flag that is turned on if the generation of backup data is completed normally when the power is cut off, and is a flag that indicates that the backup data is valid when associated with the generated backup data. If the determination in step S907 is YES, processing proceeds to step S908, and if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S904.

In step S908, the CPU 101 determines whether the checksum is normal. If the determination in step S908 is YES, the process proceeds to step S909, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S904.

In step S909, the CPU 101 executes the recovery process (see FIG. 8) described below, and the process proceeds to step S910.

In step S910, the CPU 101 sets the period (4 ms) of the built-in CTC (timer counter). The CPU 101 uses the period set here to execute the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 9), which will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S911.

In step S911, the CPU 101 executes the power interruption monitoring process (see FIG. 7) described below, and the process proceeds to step S912.

In step S912, the CPU 101 sets the timer interrupt processing to be disabled, and the process proceeds to step S913.

In step S913, the CPU 101 updates (counts up) various initial random numbers, and the process proceeds to step S914. Here, the initial random number is a random number for determining the start value of various random numbers (jackpot random number, pattern random number, reach random number, and variable pattern random number) that are counted up and updated in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 9) described later, and multiple initial random numbers are prepared corresponding to various random numbers. The initial random number is counted up and updated both in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 9) that occurs every predetermined CTC period (4 ms) and in the main process (see FIG. 6) that is processed during the remaining time (i.e., the time obtained by subtracting the processing time required for the timer interrupt process from the predetermined CTC period), and after reaching the maximum value (e.g., 299) of the set random number, it returns to the minimum value (e.g., 0). In addition, this remaining time is irregular because it varies depending on the processing status of the CPU 101, and the number of updates of the initial random number updated during the remaining time is also irregular. On the other hand, as will be described in detail later, the other random numbers (jackpot random numbers, pattern random numbers, reach random numbers, and variable pattern random numbers) are only updated by timer interrupt processing (see Figure 9), and therefore the processing cycle of the random number update process differs from that of the initial value random number. In this way, due to the difference in processing cycle, even if the random number range of the initial value random number and the jackpot random number are the same (e.g., 0 to 299), the value of the initial value random number obtained as the starting value of the jackpot random number will be irregular each time. This makes it difficult to predict the timing at which the jackpot random number value that will cause a jackpot will be obtained.

In step S914, the CPU 101 sets the timer interrupt processing to be enabled, and the process returns to step S911. In other words, the CPU 101 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S911 to S914.

[Power Shutdown Monitoring Processing by the Main Control Unit 100]
Fig. 7 is a detailed flowchart of the power cutoff monitoring process in step S911 in Fig. 6. In step S9111 in Fig. 6, the CPU 101 prohibits interrupt processing, and the process proceeds to step S9112.

In step S9112, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the power supply to the gaming machine 1 has been cut off based on whether or not a power cut-off signal has been input from a power supply unit (not shown). If the determination in step S9112 is YES, the process proceeds to step S9114, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S9113.

In step S9113, the CPU 101 permits interrupt processing and ends the power shutdown monitoring process (processing proceeds to step S912 in FIG. 6).

On the other hand, in step S9114, CPU 101 clears the output port through which various information is input and output to CPU 101, and processing proceeds to step S9115.

In step S9115, the CPU 101 creates backup data in the RAM 103 based on the current game status of the gaming machine 1, etc., and then creates a checksum from the contents of the RAM 103 and stores it in the RAM 103. This process is performed from the time it is detected that the power supply voltage has started to drop due to a power cutoff of the power supplied to the main control unit 100 (from the time "YES" is determined in step S9112) until the power supply voltage drops to a predetermined value. This process stores game status information and the like immediately before the power was cut off in the RAM 103. Then, the process proceeds to step S9116.

In step S9116, the CPU 101 sets the backup flag to "ON" and processing proceeds to step S9117.

In step S9117, the CPU 101 prohibits access to the RAM 103 and ends the power interruption monitoring process (processing proceeds to step S912 in FIG. 6).

[Recovery process by main control unit 100]
Fig. 8 is a detailed flowchart of the recovery process in step S909 in Fig. 6. First, in step S9091 in Fig. 8, the CPU 101 sets a work area in the RAM 103 during recovery, and the process proceeds to step S9092.

In step S9092, the CPU 101 refers to the information in the RAM 103 to confirm information relating to the game status and the number of reserved special pattern lotteries at the time of the power cut, and sends a recovery notification command including this information to the performance control unit 400. In this way, the CPU 101 sends a recovery notification command indicating the status at the time of the power cut to the performance control unit 400 to notify that the power supply to the gaming machine 1 has been restored. By processing this step S9092, the performance control unit 400 can confirm the game status, etc. before the power cut.

In step S9093, the CPU 101 sets the peripheral area, and processing proceeds to step S9094.

In step S9094, the CPU 101 sets the backup flag to "OFF" and terminates the recovery process (processing proceeds to step S910 in FIG. 6).

[Timer interrupt processing in the main control unit]
Next, the timer interrupt processing executed in the main control unit 100 will be described. Fig. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control unit 100. The timer interrupt processing executed in the main control unit 100 will be described below with reference to Fig. 9. During normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on or off, the main control unit 100 repeatedly executes a series of processes shown in Fig. 9 at regular intervals (4 milliseconds). The processes executed in the main control unit 100, which will be described based on the flowcharts in Fig. 9 and subsequent figures, are executed based on a program stored in the ROM 102.

First, in step S1, the CPU 101 of the main control unit 100 executes a random number update process to update various random numbers such as the jackpot random number, the pattern random number, the reach random number, and the variable pattern random number, and to update the initial value random number that is the starting value when each random number is counted up and updated. Here, the jackpot random number is a random number for determining whether or not the special pattern lottery has been won (i.e., a special pattern lottery is performed). The pattern random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot if the special pattern lottery has been won. In addition, the determination of whether or not the special pattern lottery has been won and the determination of the type of jackpot if it has been won may be considered as the special pattern lottery. The jackpot random number and the pattern random number are random numbers used in the process of step S407 in FIG. 11, which will be described later. The reach random number is a random number for determining whether or not a reach performance is performed if the special pattern lottery has been lost. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern that specifies the variation time of the special pattern. Here, the variation time of the special pattern is equal to the execution time of the notification performance (variation performance) that is executed in synchronization with the variation of the special pattern. The reach random number and the variation pattern random number are used in the process of step S408 in FIG. 11, which will be described later. In the random number update process of step S1, the jackpot random number, the pattern random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number are each updated by adding 1. That is, they are counted up. Then, in the start switch (SW) process of step S2 and the gate switch (SW) process of step S3, each random number is obtained and used in the special pattern process of step S4 and the normal pattern process of step S5, which will be described later. The counter that performs the process of step S1 is typically a loop counter, and after reaching the maximum value of the set random number (for example, 299 for the variation pattern random number), it returns to 0 again (that is, it circulates). In addition, in the random number update process of step S1, when the loop counter counts for each counter such as the jackpot random number, the pattern random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number, each acquires an initial value random number corresponding to each random number at that time when the loop counter counts once, and starts a new count of the loop counter with the value of the initial value random number as the starting value. Note that the random number ranges for the jackpot random number, the pattern random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number can be set arbitrarily, but it is preferable to set each to a different range so that the counter values (count values) between these random numbers are not synchronized.

Next, in step S2, the CPU 101 monitors the state of the first start hole switch 45a and the second start hole switch 47a, and when it determines that a game ball has entered the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47, it executes start hole switch processing to perform processing related to the reserved number U1 for the first special pattern lottery and the reserved number U2 for the second special pattern lottery, and to obtain various random numbers. Details of this start hole switch processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 10.

Next, in step S3, the CPU 101 monitors the state of the gate switch 44a, and when it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through the gate 44, it determines whether the number of reserved balls for the normal symbol lottery is less than an upper limit (e.g., 4), and if it determines that the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit, it executes gate switch processing to obtain a random number to be used in the normal symbol processing in step S5, which will be described later.

Next, in step S4, the CPU 101 executes a first special symbol lottery or a second special symbol lottery, and after causing the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 to variably display the special symbols, executes a display process of the stopped symbols showing the results of these lotteries, and executes a special symbol process for sending various commands to the performance control unit 400, etc. This special symbol process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 11.

Next, in step S5, the CPU 101 executes normal pattern processing to determine whether the random number acquired in the gate switch processing in step S3 matches a predetermined winning random number. Then, the CPU 101 displays a normal pattern on the normal pattern display 62 in a variable manner, and then displays a normal pattern indicating the determination result in a stationary manner. Specifically, the CPU 101 sets the normal pattern variable time for which the normal pattern is displayed in a stationary manner after the normal pattern is displayed in a variable manner to, for example, 10 seconds in the non-time-saving state, and shortens it to, for example, 0.5 seconds in the time-saving state. In addition, the CPU 101 sets the probability that the normal pattern displayed on the normal pattern display 62 will become a predetermined winning pattern (i.e., the probability of winning the normal pattern lottery) to a low probability (for example, 1/10) in the non-time-saving state, and increases it to a high probability (for example, 0/10) in the time-saving state.

Next, in step S6, if the special pattern processing in step S4 determines that the special pattern lottery has been won (if a big win has been won) or if the special pattern lottery has been won, the CPU 101 executes a big prize opening process that controls the big prize opening opening/closing section (first big prize opening opening/closing section 51b, second big prize opening opening/closing section 57b) to cause the big prize openings (first big prize opening 50, second big prize opening 56) to perform a predetermined opening/closing operation. In addition, the CPU 101 transmits various commands to the performance control section 400 regarding the big prize game performance executed during the big prize game and the small prize game performance executed during the small prize game. This process allows the big prize game (special game) and the small prize game to proceed, and the player can win a large number of prize balls. This big prize opening process will be described in detail later with reference to Figures 16 to 18.

Next, in step S7, the CPU 101 executes a second start opening/closing process to operate the variable start unit 46 if the normal pattern displayed on the normal pattern display 62 by the normal pattern process in step S5 is a predetermined winning pattern (i.e., if the normal pattern lottery is won). In this case, the CPU 101 controls the variable start unit 46 to open for an extremely short period of time (e.g., once every 0.10 seconds) in the non-time-saving state, and controls the variable start unit 46 to open for a long period of time (e.g., twice every 0.90 seconds) in the time-saving state. Note that by controlling the variable start unit 46 to the open state, the second start unit 47 becomes available for a game ball to enter, and when a game ball enters the second start unit 47, a second special pattern lottery is held.

Next, in step S8, the CPU 101 executes prize ball processing to manage the number of winning game balls and control the payout of prize balls according to the winning balls.

Next, in step S9, the CPU 101 executes an output process to output various commands and information required for the presentation set in the RAM 103 in the start port switch process in step S2, the special symbol process in step S4, the large prize port process in step S6, the prize ball process in step S8, etc., to the presentation control unit 400 or the payout control unit 300. Each time a game ball enters the first start port 45, the second start port 47, the first large prize port 50, the second large prize port 56, or the normal prize port 43, the CPU 101 sets a winning command in the RAM 103 to notify the respective winning port that the game ball has entered, and outputs the winning command to the presentation control unit 400 or the payout control unit 300.

[Start switch processing]
Fig. 10 is an example of a detailed flowchart of the start port switch processing in step S2 of Fig. 9. The start port switch processing in step S2 of Fig. 9 will be described below with reference to Fig. 10.

First, in step S201, the CPU 101 of the main control unit 100 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first start hole 45 based on the output signal from the first start hole switch 45a. If the determination in step S201 is YES, the process proceeds to step S202, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S207.

In step S202, the CPU 101 reads the upper limit Umax1 ("4" in this embodiment) of the reserved number for the first special symbol lottery from the ROM 102, and determines whether the reserved number U1 for the first special symbol lottery stored in the RAM 103 is less than the upper limit Umax1. If the determination in step S202 is YES, the process proceeds to step S203, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S207.

In step S203, the CPU 101 updates the reserved number U1 stored in the RAM 103 by adding 1 to the value. The CPU 101 also sets a winning command in the RAM 103 to notify the performance control unit 400 that the game ball has won the first starting hole 45. This winning command is sent to the performance control unit 400 by the output process of step S9 in FIG. 9. Then, the process proceeds to step S204.

In step S204, the CPU 101 obtains a set of random numbers (jackpot random number, pattern random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number) to be used for the first special pattern lottery, etc. Then, the process proceeds to step S205.

In step S205, the CPU 101 performs a pre-determination process and stores each set of random numbers (game information) acquired in step S204 in chronological order in the RAM 103. Specifically, the CPU 101 pre-determines whether the result of the first special pattern lottery using the jackpot random number is a jackpot or not, whether a reach effect is to be executed, etc., based on whether the jackpot random number of the random number set, such as the jackpot random number acquired in the most recent process of step S204, matches a predetermined value, etc. stored in the ROM 102. In other words, the determination required to execute the look-ahead notice effect or the hold change notice effect (hold change effect) is pre-determined prior to the processing of steps S407 and S408 in FIG. 11 described later. In addition, when a small win is won in the special symbol lottery, the game ball passes through the specific area 224 (see FIG. 2) with a high probability in the small win game, and a big win occurs. However, since there is no small win in the first special symbol lottery in this embodiment, the pre-determination process in step S205 does not perform a pre-determination as to whether or not it is a small win. After that, each set of random numbers used in the pre-determination (reserved data of the first special symbol lottery) is stored in the RAM 103 in chronological order. In addition, each time the value of the reserved number U1 of the first special symbol lottery is subtracted by 1 by the process of step S406 in FIG. 11 described later, the random number sets stored in the RAM 103 are deleted one by one in order of the earliest storage time. For example, when the value of the reserved number U1 of the first special symbol lottery is "3", the random number sets of the most recent three times acquired by the process of step S204 are stored in the RAM 103 in chronological order. Processing then proceeds to step S206.

In step S206, the CPU 101 sets in the RAM 103 a first reserved number increase command notifying that the reserved number for the first special pattern lottery has increased by one. Here, this first reserved number increase command includes information indicating the result of the preliminary judgment made in the processing of step S205 (hereinafter referred to as "preliminary judgment information"). Note that the first reserved number increase command including this preliminary judgment information is output by the output processing of step S9 in FIG. 9, and the lottery results for the reserved numbers for the first special pattern lottery are notified from the main control unit 100 to the performance control unit 400 before the pattern change in the first special pattern lottery begins. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S207.

In step S207, the CPU 101 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the second start hole 47 based on the output signal from the second start hole switch 47a. If the determination in step S207 is YES, the process proceeds to step S208, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S3 (gate switch process) in FIG. 9.

In step S208, the CPU 101 reads the upper limit Umax2 ("4" in this embodiment) of the reserved number for the second special symbol selection from the ROM 102, and determines whether the reserved number U2 for the second special symbol selection stored in the RAM 103 is less than the upper limit Umax2. If the determination in step S208 is YES, the process proceeds to step S209, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S3 (gate switch process) in FIG. 8.

In step S209, the CPU 101 updates the value of the reserved number U2 stored in the RAM 103 by adding 1 to the value. The CPU 101 also sets a winning command in the RAM 103 to notify the performance control unit 400 that the game ball has won in the second starting hole 47. This winning command is sent to the performance control unit 400 by the output process of step S9 in FIG. 9. Then, the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, the CPU 101 obtains a set of random numbers (jackpot random number, pattern random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number) to be used for the second special pattern lottery, etc. Then, the process proceeds to step S211.

In step S211, the CPU 101 performs a pre-determination process and stores each set of random numbers (game information) acquired in step S210 in chronological order in the RAM 103. Specifically, the CPU 101 pre-determines whether the result of the second special pattern lottery using the jackpot random number is a jackpot or a small jackpot, whether to execute a reach performance, etc., based on whether the jackpot random number of the random number set, such as the jackpot random number acquired in the most recent process of step S210, matches a predetermined value, etc. stored in the ROM 102. In other words, the determination required to execute a look-ahead notice performance or a hold change notice performance (hold change performance) is pre-determined prior to the processing of steps S407 and S408 in FIG. 11 described later. In addition, when a small win is won in the special symbol lottery, the game ball passes through the specific area 224 (see FIG. 2) in the small win game with a high probability, and a big win occurs, so in the pre-determination process of step S211, a pre-determination is also made as to whether or not it is a small win. After that, each set of random numbers used in the pre-determination (reserved data of the second special symbol lottery) is stored in RAM 103 in chronological order. In addition, each time the value of the reserved number U2 of the second special symbol lottery is decremented by 1 by the process of step S404 of FIG. 11 described later, the random number sets stored in RAM 103 are deleted one by one in order of the earliest storage time. For example, if the value of the reserved number U2 of the second special symbol lottery is "3", the random number sets of the most recent three times obtained by the process of step S210 are stored in RAM 103 in chronological order. Then, the process proceeds to step S212.

In step S212, the CPU 101 sets in the RAM 103 a second reserved number increase command notifying that the reserved number for the second special symbol lottery has increased by one. Here, this second reserved number increase command contains information (pre-determination information) indicating the result of the pre-determination made in the processing of step S211. Note that the second reserved number increase command including this pre-determination information is output by the output processing of step S9 in FIG. 9, so that the lottery results for the reserved numbers for the second special symbol lottery are notified from the main control unit 100 to the performance control unit 400 before the pattern change in the second special symbol lottery begins. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S3 (gate switch processing) in FIG. 9.

[Special pattern processing]
Fig. 11 is an example of a detailed flowchart of the special symbol processing in step S4 in Fig. 9. The special symbol processing in step S4 in Fig. 9 will be described below with reference to Fig. 11.

First, in step S401, the CPU 101 of the main control unit 100 determines whether the current state of the gaming machine 1 is in a big win game or a small win game based on information stored in the RAM 103 (e.g., information from a flag). In other words, it determines whether the gaming machine 1 is in a big win game (special game) that is executed when a special pattern lottery is won, or a small win game that is executed when a small win is won in the special pattern lottery. If the determination in step S401 is YES, the process proceeds to step S5 (normal pattern processing) in FIG. 9, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S402.

In step S402, the CPU 101 determines whether or not it is currently during the period in which the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 is displaying a changing special symbol. Note that the period in which the special symbol is displaying a changing special symbol includes the specified special symbol stop display period (specified time; 0.5 seconds) that is set immediately after the special symbol stops changing. If the determination in step S402 is YES, the process proceeds to step S411, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S403.

In step S403, the CPU 101 determines whether the reserved number U2 stored in the RAM 103 is 1 or more (i.e., whether the second special symbol lottery is reserved). If the determination in step S403 is YES, the process proceeds to step S404, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S405.

In step S404, the CPU 101 updates the reserved number U2 stored in the RAM 103 to a value that is one less. At that time, the CPU 101 reads out the random number set that was stored earliest among the random number sets acquired and stored in steps S210 and S211 of FIG. 10 and stored in the RAM 103, and deletes it from the RAM 103. After that, the process proceeds to step S407.

On the other hand, in step S405, the CPU 101 determines whether the reserved number U1 stored in the RAM 103 is 1 or more (i.e., whether the first special symbol lottery is reserved). If the determination in step S405 is YES, the process proceeds to step S406, and if the determination is NO, there is no special symbol lottery to be executed, so the process proceeds to step S415.

In step S406, the CPU 101 updates the reserved number U1 stored in the RAM 103 to a value obtained by subtracting 1. At that time, the CPU 101 reads out the random number set that was stored earliest among the random number sets acquired and stored in steps S204 and S205 of FIG. 10 and stored in the RAM 103, and deletes it from the RAM 103. After that, the process proceeds to step S407.

By carrying out the above steps S403 to S406, the second special symbol lottery is executed in priority over the first special symbol lottery.

In step S407, the CPU 101 executes a jackpot determination process to determine whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot or a miss. Specifically, when executing the process of step S407 following the process of step S404, the CPU 101 determines whether the result of the second special symbol lottery is a jackpot, a small jackpot (which can also be considered as a specific miss that is beneficial to the player), or a miss, based on whether the jackpot random number read from the RAM 103 in the process of step S404 matches the winning value of the jackpot stored in the ROM 102. On the other hand, when executing the process of step S407 following the process of step S406, the CPU 101 determines whether the result of the first special symbol lottery is a jackpot or a miss, based on whether the jackpot random number read from the RAM 103 in the process of step S406 matches the winning value of the jackpot stored in the ROM 102. As described above, in this embodiment, the small win is provided only in the second special symbol lottery, and the probability of winning the small win is, for example, 1/10. If the CPU 101 determines that the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss, it sets the miss symbol representing the miss in the special symbol lottery as the stop symbol of the special symbol in the setting information in the RAM 103. On the other hand, if the CPU 101 determines that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, it determines the type of the current jackpot based on which of the predetermined values stored in the ROM 102 the symbol random number read from the RAM 103 together with the jackpot random number used in this determination matches. In this embodiment, as an example, there is a time-saving jackpot that is set to a time-saving play state after the jackpot game, and a normal jackpot that is set to a normal play state after the jackpot game. In this embodiment, the first special symbol lottery is assigned 50% time-saving jackpot and 50% normal jackpot, and the second special symbol lottery is assigned 100% time-saving jackpot. The time-saving game state set after the time-saving jackpot game is played continues for up to 100 spins (until 100 special symbol lotteries have been played) (except when the game ends with the next jackpot). Then, the CPU 101 sets information about a jackpot or minor jackpot, and, in the case of a jackpot, information about the jackpot symbol that indicates the type of jackpot, in the RAM 103 as information about the stopped symbol of the special symbol in the setting information. After that, the process proceeds to step S408.

[Variation pattern selection process]
In step S408, the CPU 101 executes a variation pattern selection process. Specifically, in step S408, the CPU 101 uses the variation pattern determination tables HT1-1 and HT1-2 shown in Figs. 12 and 13 in the normal game state (non-time-saving state), and uses the variation pattern determination tables HT2-1 and HT2-2 shown in Figs. 14 and 15 in the time-saving game state to determine (select) a variation pattern for each special symbol lottery. Here, this variation pattern is a special symbol variation time, which is the time from when the special symbol is displayed on the special symbol display (60, 61) to when it is stopped (determined stop display), and this special symbol variation time is synchronized with the execution time of the notification performance and is the same time as the execution time of the notification performance. In the following, the fluctuation pattern determination tables HT1-1, HT1-2, HT2-1 and HT2-2 may be simply referred to as HT1-1, HT1-2, HT2-1 and HT2-2.

First, we will explain the case where a variation pattern is selected using HT1-1 and HT1-2 shown in Figures 12 and 13 during normal gameplay (non-time-saving state). Figure 12 is a table used to determine a variation pattern when a first special symbol lottery is executed in step S407 during normal gameplay (non-time-saving state). Figure 13 is a table used to determine a variation pattern when a second special symbol lottery is executed in step S407 during normal gameplay (non-time-saving state).

[Non-time-saving state/variation pattern selection process in first special pattern lottery]
Below, with reference to FIG. 12, the determination of the variation pattern when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the processing of step S407 in the normal gaming state (non-time-saving state) will be explained.

In step S408, if the CPU 101 determines that the result of the first special symbol lottery is a jackpot in the jackpot determination process of step S407, the CPU 101 determines the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern random number. Specifically, the CPU 101 determines the fluctuation pattern based on whether the fluctuation pattern random number (any one of 0 to 299) read from the RAM 103 together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination process of step S407 matches any one of the random number values assigned to each fluctuation pattern in the "jackpot" portion of HT1-1. For example, if the fluctuation pattern random number read from the RAM 103 together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination process of step S407 is "92", the CPU 101 determines "2" as the fluctuation pattern because it is included in the random number value "20 to 299" assigned to the fluctuation pattern "2" in the "jackpot" portion of HT1-1. Here, as shown in HT1-1, the variation patterns "6", "4", and "2" in the "jackpot" portion correspond to the variation times of the special symbols (i.e., the execution times of the notification effect) of "15 seconds", "60 seconds", and "90 seconds", respectively, and also correspond to the types of notification effect patterns "reach hit", "SP hit", and "SPSP hit". Also, a "reach hit" is a type in which a jackpot occurs after a reach is established, an "SP hit" is a type in which a jackpot occurs after a reach is established and eventually develops into an SP reach, and an "SPSP hit" is a type in which a jackpot occurs after a reach is established and eventually develops into an SPSP reach.

Note that a reach (reach effect) is an effect in which, for example, when the last of multiple decorative symbols to stop is displayed (temporarily stopped) as a specific symbol during a notification effect, it creates the expectation that it will form a jackpot pattern together with other symbols that are already stopped (temporarily stopped). Typically, the right and left decorative symbols stop (temporarily stopped) as the same symbol (e.g., 7), and the central decorative symbol that stops last will stop (temporarily stopped) as the same symbol (e.g., 7) (i.e., a repeat number 777). This reach state may be called a reach state. Also, an SP reach (SP reach effect), generally called a super reach or special reach, is an effect that is executed in a reach state and creates even more expectation of a jackpot than the above reaches, for example, a video effect in which the main character fights an enemy character. Additionally, the SPSP reach (SPSP reach effect), commonly known as the Super Super Reach or Special Special Reach, is performed in a reach state and is an effect that creates even greater anticipation of a jackpot than the SP reach, such as a video effect in which the main character fights an enemy boss character.

In addition, in step S408, if the CPU 101 determines that the result of the first special pattern lottery is a miss in the jackpot determination process of step S407, it determines the fluctuation pattern (special pattern fluctuation time) based on the number of reserved symbols (U1) in the first special pattern lottery, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number.

Specifically, when the reserved number for the first special pattern lottery is "0", the CPU 101 determines whether the reach random number (any one of 0 to 99) read from RAM 103 together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination process of step S407 is included in the reach random number range "0 to 79" or the reach random number range "80 to 99" of the reserved number "0" portion of the "miss" of HT1-1.

Then, if the read-out reach random number is within the reach random number range "0 to 79", the CPU 101 determines the variation pattern to be "7". Here, as shown in HT1-1, the variation pattern "7" corresponds to the variation time of the special symbol of "12 seconds", and also corresponds to the type of presentation pattern of the notification presentation of "instant miss".

On the other hand, if the read-out reach random number is within the reach random number value range "80-99", the CPU 101 determines the fluctuation pattern (special symbol fluctuation time) based on which of the fluctuation pattern random number ranges assigned to each fluctuation pattern in the reach random number value range "80-99" portion of HT1-1 the fluctuation pattern random number (any one of 0-299) read from RAM 103 together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination process of step S407 is included in. For example, if the fluctuation pattern random number read from RAM 103 together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination process of step S407 is "280", the fluctuation pattern random number is within the fluctuation pattern random number value range "244-285" assigned to fluctuation pattern "1", so the CPU 101 determines "1" as the fluctuation pattern. Here, as shown in HT1-1, the variation patterns "5", "3", and "1" in the reach random number range "80 to 99" of HT1-1 correspond to the variation times of the special symbols "15 seconds", "60 seconds", and "90 seconds", respectively, and also correspond to the types of notification effect patterns "reach miss", "SP miss", and "SPSP miss". A "reach miss" is a type that misses after a reach is established, an "SP miss" is a type that misses after a reach is established and eventually develops into an SP reach, and an "SPSP miss" is a type that misses after a reach is established and eventually develops into an SP reach.

When the reserved number for the first special pattern lottery is "1", "2", "3, 4", the CPU 101 determines the variation pattern in a manner similar to that when the reserved number for the first special pattern lottery is "0". However, when the reserved number for the first special pattern lottery is "1", "2", "3, 4", as shown in HT1-1, compared to when the reserved number for the first special pattern lottery is "0", variation pattern "8" is added in which the type of notification effect pattern is "instant miss" and the variation time of the special pattern is "12 seconds", and the allocation of the reach random number and the variation pattern random number is also different.

[Non-time-saving state/variation pattern selection process in second special pattern lottery]
The following describes the determination of the variation pattern when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the process of step S407 in the normal game state (non-time-saving state) with reference to FIG. 13. In step S408, the CPU 101 determines the variation pattern by performing a process basically similar to the process of the variation pattern determination described with reference to FIG. 12. However, the CPU 101 performs the process for the first special symbol lottery using HT1-1 in the process of the variation pattern determination described with reference to FIG. 12, whereas the CPU 101 performs the process for the second special symbol lottery using HT1-2 shown in FIG. 13. In addition, the HT1-2 shown in FIG. 13 is different from the HT1-1 shown in FIG. 12 in that the "reserved number of the first special symbol lottery" is replaced with the "reserved number of the second special lottery", and a variation pattern in the case of a small win is added. Also, if it is determined that a small win has occurred in the big win determination process of step S407, in step S408, the CPU 101 determines the fluctuation pattern based on whether the fluctuation pattern random number (any one of 0 to 299) read from the RAM 103 together with the big win random number used in this big win determination process matches any one of the random number values assigned to each fluctuation pattern of the "small win" part of HT1-2. For example, if the fluctuation pattern random number read from the RAM 103 together with the big win random number used in the big win determination process of step S407 is "2", the CPU 101 determines "11" as the fluctuation pattern because it is included in the random number value "0 to 3" assigned to the fluctuation pattern "11" of the "small win" part of HT1-2. Here, as shown in HT1-2, the fluctuation patterns of the "small hit" part, "11", "10", and "9", respectively correspond to the fluctuation times of the special pattern (i.e., the execution time of the notification effect) "15 seconds", "60 seconds", and "90 seconds", and also correspond to the types of notification effect presentation patterns, "reach hit", "SP hit", and "SPSP hit".

[Time-saving state/variation pattern selection process in the first special pattern lottery]
The following describes the determination of the variation pattern when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the process of step S407 in the time-saving game state (time-saving state) with reference to Fig. 14. In step S408, the CPU 101 determines the variation pattern by performing a process basically similar to the process of the variation pattern determination described with reference to Fig. 12. However, the CPU 101 performs the process for the first special symbol lottery in the normal game state (non-time-saving state) using HT1-1 in the process of the variation pattern determination described with reference to Fig. 12, whereas the CPU 101 performs the process for the first special symbol lottery in the time-saving game state (time-saving state) using HT2-1 shown in Fig. 14 in the process of the variation pattern determination. Here, in HT1-1 shown in Fig. 12, when the reserved number of the first special symbol lottery is "1" to "4", it is possible to determine the variation pattern "8" (corresponding to an immediate miss with a variation time of "2 seconds"), whereas HT2-1 shown in Fig. 14 is different in that it cannot determine the variation pattern "8" even when the reserved number is "1" to "4". In other words, even when the reserved number of the first special symbol lottery is "1" to "4", the short variation time "2 seconds" is not determined.

[Time-saving state/variation pattern selection process in second special pattern lottery]
Hereinafter, the determination of the variation pattern when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the process of step S407 in the time-saving game state (time-saving state) will be described with reference to FIG. 15. In step S408, the CPU 101 determines the variation pattern by performing a process basically similar to the process of the variation pattern determination described with reference to FIG. 13. However, the CPU 101 performs the process for the second special symbol lottery in the time-saving game state (time-saving state) using HT1-2 in the process of the variation pattern determination described with reference to FIG. 13, whereas the CPU 101 performs the process for the second special symbol lottery in the time-saving game state (time-saving state) using HT2-2 shown in FIG. 15. Also, as shown in FIG. 15, the allocation of the reach random number and the variation pattern random number is the same as that of the HT1-2 shown in FIG. 13 when the reserved number is "1" to "4", and the variation pattern corresponding to "no reach" is only "8".

The information on the variation pattern determined in step S408 in the above manner (i.e., information on the execution time of the notification effect and the type of effect pattern) is set in RAM 103 as setting information. Processing then proceeds to step S409.

In step S409, the CPU 101 generates an alarm effect start command including the setting information set by the big win determination process in step S407 and the setting information set by the variation pattern selection process in step S408, and sets it in the RAM 103. Here, the alarm effect start command is a command that instructs the performance control unit 400 to start an alarm effect by the image display unit (70, 71) and the speaker 9, etc. In addition, the setting information included in the alarm effect start command also includes information indicating which of the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery has been executed. From this, it can be said that there are types of alarm effect start commands according to the information included. In addition, the CPU 101 sets a game state notification command indicating the current game state (for example, a time-saving game state) in the RAM 103. The above-mentioned alarm effect start command and game state notification command are transmitted to the performance control unit 400 by the output process in step S9 of FIG. 9. Processing then proceeds to step S410.

In step S410, the CPU 101 starts the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 based on the setting information included in the notification performance start command set in the processing of step S409. Then, the processing proceeds to step S411.

In step S411, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the special pattern change time indicated by the change pattern set in the change pattern selection process in step S408 has elapsed since the start of the special pattern change display in step S410. If the determination in step S411 is YES, the process proceeds to step S412, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S5 (normal pattern processing) in FIG. 9.

In step S412, the CPU 101 sets in the RAM 103 a notification effect stop command (pattern determination command) that instructs the image display units (70, 71) and the like to end the notification effect. Then, the process proceeds to step S413. The notification effect stop command set in step S412 is sent to the effect control unit 400 by the output process of step S9 in FIG. 9.

In step S413, the CPU 101 ends the display of the changing special patterns by the first special pattern display device 60 or the second special pattern display device 61 that was started in the processing of step S410, and causes the first special pattern display device 60 or the second special pattern display device 61 to display the pattern that indicates the special pattern lottery result in a stopped state for a specified time (0.5 seconds). After that, the processing proceeds to step S414.

In step S414, the CPU 101 executes processing during the stop. Specifically, if the CPU 101 determines that a jackpot has been hit in the jackpot determination process of step S407, it changes the information stored in the RAM 103 (e.g., information based on a flag) to indicate that a jackpot is being played, and sets an opening command in the RAM 103 that instructs the start of a jackpot game presentation. Also, if the CPU 101 determines that a small jackpot has been hit in the jackpot determination process of step S407, it changes the information stored in the RAM 103 (e.g., information based on a flag) to indicate that a small jackpot is being played, and sets an opening command in the RAM 103 that instructs the start of a small jackpot game presentation. In addition, the opening command for the big win game and the small win game is sent to the performance control unit 400 by the output process of step S9 in FIG. 9 when a specified time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed from the point when the stopped display of the special pattern is started in the process of step S413, and the big win game performance or the small win game performance is started.

In step S415, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the customer waiting command and the game status notification command indicating the current game status have already been sent in the process of step S416 (described below). Here, the customer waiting command is a command that is sent when there are no pending special pattern lotteries at the time when the stopped display of the special patterns has ended, and is a command that notifies that a state has been reached in which the notification performance for notifying the results of the special pattern lottery is not being executed (the so-called customer waiting state). If the determination in step S415 is YES, the process proceeds to step S5 (normal pattern processing) in FIG. 9, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S416.

In step S416, the CPU 101 sets a customer waiting command and a game status notification command in the RAM 103. The customer waiting command and the game status notification command are sent to the performance control unit 400 by the output process of step S9 in FIG. 9, and a predetermined stop performance (for example, a performance during customer waiting in which a decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state) is started based on the customer waiting command. Note that when a predetermined time (for example, 90 seconds) has elapsed since the above-mentioned stop performance started, the customer waiting performance starts. Here, the customer waiting performance is, for example, a performance in which a video related to the content (anime, story, etc.) that is the subject of the gaming machine 1 is displayed on the image display unit (70, 71), or, for example, a performance in which a part of a predetermined performance (for example, SP reach performance) executed during the game is displayed on the image display unit. After that, the process moves to step S5 (normal pattern processing) in FIG. 9.

[Big prize slot processing]
Figures 16 to 18 are an example of a detailed flowchart of the special prize opening process in step S6 of Figure 9. The special prize opening process in step S6 of Figure 9 will be described below with reference to Figures 16 to 18.

First, in step S601, the CPU 101 of the main control unit 100 determines whether or not a small win is being played based on information (e.g., flag information) stored in the RAM 103. If the determination in step S601 is YES, the process proceeds to step S602, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S651 in FIG. 17.

In step S602, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the small win game is in the opening stage based on the information stored in the RAM 103. If the determination in step S602 is YES, the process proceeds to step S603, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S606.

In step S603, the CPU 101 determines whether the set opening time that specifies the execution time of the opening of the small win game has elapsed. If the determination in step S603 is YES, the process proceeds to step S604, and if the determination is NO, the opening has not ended, so the process proceeds to step S651 in FIG. 17.

In step S604, the CPU 101 controls the first large prize opening opening/closing section 51b to start opening control of the first large prize opening 50. This process starts a round of small prize play (round play) and starts the opening operation (one opening operation) of the first large prize opening 50. Note that the number of rounds executed in the small prize play is one. After that, the process proceeds to step S605.

In step S605, the CPU 101 sets a round start notification command in the RAM 103 to notify the start of a round of small win play (start of round play). This round start notification command is sent to the performance control unit 400 by the output process of step S9 in FIG. 9, and the round performance corresponding to the round of small win play is started. After that, the process proceeds to step S607.

In step S606, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the small win game is ending based on the information stored in the RAM 103. If the determination in step S606 is YES, the process proceeds to step S619, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S607.

In step S607, the CPU 101 determines whether it is time to open the specific area 224 (see FIG. 2) inside the first large prize opening 50 (first variable prize section 49). This timing is the timing when a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the first large prize opening 50 was opened in step S604. If the determination in step S607 is YES, the process proceeds to step S608, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S609.

In step S608, the CPU 101 starts specific area opening control by controlling the specific area opening/closing unit 150 to open the opening/closing member 221 and allow the game ball to pass through the specific area 224. Then, the process proceeds to step S609.

In step S609, the CPU 101 determines whether or not a specified opening control time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the opening control of the specific area 224 was started in the processing of step S608. In other words, it determines whether or not the specified time (e.g., 5 seconds) for opening the specific area 224 has elapsed. If the determination in step S609 is YES, the process proceeds to step S610, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S611.

In step S610, the CPU 101 controls the specific area opening/closing unit 150 to close the opening/closing member 221, and ends the opening control of the specific area 224. Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

In step S611, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area 224 based on the output signal from the specific area switch 151. If the determination in step S611 is YES, the process proceeds to step S612, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S613.

In step S612, the CPU 101 sets the occurrence of a time-saving jackpot, and also sets in the RAM 103 a specific area passing notification command indicating that the gaming ball has passed through the specific area 224. This specific area passing notification command is sent to the presentation control unit 400 by the output process of step S9 in FIG. 9, and a presentation is executed to notify the player that the gaming ball has passed through the specific area 224 and a time-saving jackpot has occurred. Then, the process proceeds to step S613.

In step S613, the CPU 101 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first large prize opening 50 based on the output signal from the first large prize opening switch 50a. If the determination in step S613 is YES, the process proceeds to step S614, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S615.

In step S614, the CPU 101 updates the winning number C of game balls stored in the RAM 103 by adding 1 to the value. The process of step S614 is executed each time a game ball wins in the first large winning slot 50, and the total number of game balls that have won in the first large winning slot 50 during the round of the small win game (winning number C) is cumulatively stored in the RAM 103. The CPU 101 also sets a winning command in the RAM 103 to notify the performance control unit 400 that a game ball has won in the first large winning slot 50. This winning command is sent to the performance control unit 400 by the output process of step S9 in FIG. 9, and the winning process instruction of step S129 in FIG. 21 is executed. The process then proceeds to step S615.

In step S615, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the specified opening control time (29.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the opening control of the first large winning opening 50 was started in the processing of step S604. If the determination in step S615 is YES, the processing proceeds to step S617, and if the determination is NO, the processing proceeds to step S616.

In step S616, the CPU 101 determines whether the number C of winning game balls in the small win game round has reached the upper limit number of game balls Cmax ("10" in this embodiment) that determines the timing at which the first large winning opening 50 is blocked. If the determination in step S616 is YES, the process proceeds to step S617, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S651 in FIG. 17.

In step S617, the CPU 101 controls the first large prize opening opening/closing section 51b to end the opening control of the first large prize opening 50 that was started in step S604. In this way, the CPU 101 closes the first large prize opening 50 on the condition that the total number of game balls (number of winning balls C) detected by the first large prize opening switch 50a during a round of small win play reaches 10 (Cmax) within 29.5 seconds after the first large prize opening 50 is opened, or 29.5 seconds have passed since the first large prize opening 50 was opened. Then, the process proceeds to step S618.

In step S618, the CPU 101 sets an ending command in the RAM 103 to instruct the performance control unit 400 to execute the ending performance of the small win game. The ending command set in this process is sent to the performance control unit 400 by step S9 (output process) of FIG. 9. In this embodiment, the game ball passes through the specific area 224 with a high probability during the small win game, and in most cases, the time-saving jackpot game is executed immediately after the small win game. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the specific area 224 during the small win game and the time-saving jackpot game is executed, for example, the performance control unit 400 executes the small win game performance and the time-saving jackpot game performance as one (integrated) jackpot game performance. In this case, for example, the opening effect, round effect, and ending effect of the small win game are executed as the opening effect of the time-saving big win game effect, the round effect of the first round, and the interval effect at the end of the first round, respectively. After that, the process proceeds to step S619.

In step S619, the CPU 101 determines whether a predetermined set ending time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed. If the determination in step S619 is YES, the process proceeds to step S620, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S651 in FIG. 17.

In step S620, the CPU 101 ends the small win game. Specifically, the CPU 101 cancels the setting information (e.g., flag information) stored in the RAM 103 that indicates that a small win game is in progress, and ends the small win game. After that, the process proceeds to step S621.

In step S621, the CPU 101 determines whether or not a time-saving jackpot has been set to occur in step S612. In other words, it determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area 224. If the determination in step S621 is YES, the process proceeds to step S622, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S651 in FIG. 17.

In step S622, the CPU 101 sets an opening command in the RAM 103 to instruct the output control unit 400 to execute an opening performance of the time-saving jackpot game. The opening command set in this process is sent to the performance control unit 400 by step S9 (output process) in FIG. 9. As described above, when the game ball passes through the specific area 224 during a small jackpot game and a time-saving jackpot game is executed, for example, the opening performance, round performance, and ending performance of the small jackpot game are executed as the opening performance of the time-saving jackpot game performance, the round performance of the first round, and the interval performance at the end of the first round, respectively. In this case, for example, the opening performance of the time-saving jackpot game is executed as the interval performance (the latter half) at the end of the first round of this jackpot game. After that, the process moves to step S651 in FIG. 17.

By performing the processing of steps S601 to S622 described above, a small win game is executed, and during the small win game, the game ball passes through the specific area 224 with a high probability, resulting in a time-saving big win.

In step S651 in FIG. 17, the CPU 101 determines whether or not a jackpot game is being played based on information stored in the RAM 103. If the determination in step S651 is YES, the process proceeds to step S652, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S7 in FIG. 9 (second start port opening/closing process).

In step S652, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot game is in the opening stage based on the information stored in the RAM 103. If the determination in step S652 is YES, the process proceeds to step S653, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S659.

In step S653, the CPU 101 determines whether the set opening time that specifies the execution time of the opening of the jackpot game has elapsed. If the determination in step S653 is YES, the process proceeds to step S654, and if the determination is NO, the opening has not ended, so the process proceeds to step S7 in FIG. 9 (second start port opening/closing process).

In step S654, the CPU 101 sets the total number of rounds Rmax in the jackpot game and the operation pattern of the second large winning port 56 in the jackpot game, and sets the setting information in the RAM 103. Specifically, the CPU 101 sets the number of rounds included in the jackpot game (Rmax: "15" in this embodiment) and the operation pattern of the second large winning port 56 during the jackpot game, and sets the setting information in the RAM 103. The processing in step S654 sets the total number of rounds Rmax in the jackpot game, the interval time between rounds during the jackpot game, the set ending time which is the time for the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game, and the like. Then, the processing proceeds to step S655.

In step S605, the CPU 101 resets the number C of winning balls in the second large winning slot 56, which is stored in the RAM 103, to "0." Then, the process proceeds to step S656.

In step S656, the CPU 101 updates the number of rounds R of the jackpot game stored in the RAM 103 by adding 1 to the value. Then, the process proceeds to step S657.

In step S657, the CPU 101 controls the second large prize opening opening/closing unit 57b to start opening control of the second large prize opening 56. This process starts a round of the big win game (round game) and starts the opening operation (one opening operation) of the second large prize opening 56. After that, the process proceeds to step S658.

In step S658, the CPU 101 sets in the RAM 103 a round start notification command that notifies the start of a round of the jackpot game (start of a round game). This round start notification command is sent to the presentation control unit 400 by the output process of step S9 in FIG. 9, and the round presentation of the jackpot game is started. Note that this round start notification command contains information indicating the total number of rounds Rmax set in step S654 and information indicating the current number of rounds R updated by the process of step S656. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S662.

In step S659, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot game is in an interval based on the information stored in the RAM 103. If the determination in step S659 is YES, the process proceeds to step S660, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S661.

In step S660, the CPU 101 determines whether the set interval time during jackpot play, which was set in the processing of step S654, has elapsed since the second large winning port 56 was closed at the end of the previous round during jackpot play. If the determination in step S660 is YES, it is time to start the next round during jackpot play, so the processing proceeds to step S655. If the determination is NO, it is not time to start the next round during jackpot play, so the processing proceeds to step S7 (second start port opening and closing processing) in FIG. 9.

In step S661, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the gaming machine 1 is currently executing the ending presentation of the jackpot game based on the information stored in the RAM 103. If the determination in step S661 is YES, the process proceeds to step S671 in FIG. 18, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S662.

In step S662, the CPU 101 determines that a jackpot game round is in progress, and determines whether or not a game ball has entered the second large prize opening 56 based on the output signal from the second large prize opening switch 56a. If the determination in step S662 is YES, the process proceeds to step S663, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S664.

In step S663, the CPU 101 updates the winning number C of game balls stored in the RAM 103 by adding 1. The process of step S663 is executed every time a game ball wins in the second large winning opening 56, and the total number of game balls that have won in the second large winning opening 56 during one round of the jackpot game (winning number C) is cumulatively stored in the RAM 103. The CPU 101 also sets a winning command in the RAM 103 to notify the performance control unit 400 that a game ball has won in the second large winning opening 56. This winning command is sent to the performance control unit 400 by the output process of step S9 in FIG. 9, and the winning process instruction of step S129 in FIG. 21 is executed. The process then proceeds to step S664.

In step S664, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the specified opening control time (29.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the opening control of the second large winning opening 56 was started in the processing of step S657. If the determination in step S664 is YES, the processing proceeds to step S666, and if the determination is NO, the processing proceeds to step S665.

In step S665, the CPU 101 determines whether the number of winning game balls C in the current round has reached the upper limit number of game balls Cmax ("10" in this embodiment) that determines the timing at which the second large winning opening 56 is closed. If the determination in step S665 is YES, the process proceeds to step S666, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S7 in FIG. 9 (second start opening opening process).

In step S666, the CPU 101 controls the second large prize opening opening/closing section 57b to end the opening control of the second large prize opening 56 that was started in step S657. In this way, the CPU 101 closes the second large prize opening 56 on the condition that the total number of game balls (number of winning balls C) detected by the second large prize opening switch 56a reaches 10 (Cmax) within 29.5 seconds after the second large prize opening 56 is opened, or 29.5 seconds have passed since the second large prize opening 56 was opened, during each round during the jackpot game. Then, the process proceeds to step S667.

In step S667, the CPU 101 sets a round end notification command in the RAM 103 to notify the end of the round of the jackpot game (end of the round game). This round end notification command is sent to the presentation control unit 400 by the output process of step S9 in FIG. 9, and the round presentation of the jackpot game ends. After that, the process proceeds to step S668.

In step S668, the CPU 101 determines whether the current number of rounds R stored in the RAM 103 has reached the maximum number of rounds Rmax for the jackpot game set in the processing of step S654. If the determination in step S668 is YES, the processing proceeds to step S669 in FIG. 18, and if the determination is NO, the processing proceeds to step S7 in FIG. 9 (second start port opening/closing processing).

In step S669 of FIG. 18, the CPU 101 resets the number of rounds R of the jackpot game stored in the RAM 103 to "0." Then, the process proceeds to step S670.

In step S670, the CPU 101 sets an ending command in the RAM 103 to instruct the performance control unit 400 to execute the ending performance of the jackpot game. The ending command set in this process is sent to the performance control unit 400 by step S9 (output process) in FIG. 9. Note that as this ending command, a command corresponding to the jackpot pattern (i.e., the type of jackpot) and the game state controlled after the jackpot game ends is sent, and the performance control unit 400 controls the performance after the ending performance ends (after the jackpot game performance ends) based on this ending command. Specifically, when an ending command corresponding to a jackpot pattern indicating a time-saving jackpot is sent, the performance control unit 400 executes a notification performance in a performance mode indicating a time-saving game state after the jackpot game performance ends based on the ending command. In addition, when an ending command corresponding to a jackpot pattern indicating a normal jackpot is transmitted, the presentation control unit 400 executes a notification presentation in a presentation mode indicating a normal game state after the jackpot game presentation ends based on the ending command. Then, the process proceeds to step S671.

In step S671, the CPU 101 determines whether the set ending time set in the processing of step S654 in FIG. 17 has elapsed since the ending command was set in the RAM 103 in step S670. If the determination in step S671 is YES, the processing proceeds to step S672, and if the determination is NO, the processing proceeds to step S7 in FIG. 7 (second start port opening/closing processing).

In step S672, the CPU 101 ends the jackpot game that was being executed. Specifically, the CPU 101 cancels the setting information (e.g., flag information) stored in the RAM 103 that indicates that the jackpot game is in progress, and ends the jackpot game. After that, the process proceeds to step S623.

In step S673, the CPU 101 executes a game state setting process. Specifically, when the jackpot game ends in step S622, the CPU 101 switches the game state according to the type of the current jackpot (jackpot pattern) (i.e., switches the opening setting of the variable starting unit 46, etc.). After that, the process proceeds to step S7 in FIG. 9 (second starting port opening/closing process).

The jackpot game is executed by the processing of steps S651 to S673 described above.

[Timer interrupt processing by the production control unit]
Fig. 19 is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing performed by the performance control unit 400. The timer interrupt processing performed in the performance control unit 400 will be described below with reference to Fig. 19. The performance control unit 400 repeatedly executes the series of processes shown in Fig. 19 at regular intervals (4 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on or off. The processes performed by the performance control unit 400, which will be described based on the flow charts in Fig. 19 and subsequent figures, are executed based on a program stored in ROM 402.

First, in step S11, the CPU 401 of the performance control unit 400 receives various commands output from the main control unit 100 by the output process of step S9 in FIG. 9, sets the performance content according to the received commands, and executes a command reception process to set various commands in the RAM 403 to instruct the image/sound control unit 500 and the lamp control unit 600 to perform the performance of the set performance content. This command reception process will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21.

Next, in step S11-1, the CPU 401 sets effects etc. in response to the operation of the effect button 16 etc. by the player etc., and executes an operation input process to set various commands in the RAM 403 to instruct the image/sound control unit 500 and the lamp control unit 600 to execute the effects etc. that have been set.

Next, in step S12, the CPU 401 executes an output process to output the various commands set in the RAM 403 in the processes of steps S11 and S11-1 to the image/sound control unit 500 and the lamp control unit 600. Through this process, the various effects and the like determined to be executed in the processes of steps S11 and S11-1 are executed by the image display unit (70, 71), speaker 9, panel lamp 10a, etc. under the execution control of the image/sound control unit 500 and the lamp control unit 600.

Each time the timer interrupt process is executed, the CPU 401 performs a random number update process that updates the various random numbers used to determine the effects. In this random number update process, as in the random number update process of step S1 in FIG. 9, a loop counter is typically used, and the count value (updated random number value) returns to 0 again after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99) (i.e., it cycles). In addition, in this random number update process, the counters for each random number randomly update their initial values (the value that is the starting point of the cycle) after each cycle. This makes it possible to avoid synchronization of the counter values (count values) between these random numbers.

[Command reception process]
Figures 20 and 21 are examples of detailed flowcharts of the command receiving process in step S11 in Figure 19. The command receiving process in step S11 in Figure 19 will be described below with reference to Figures 20 and 21.

First, in step S111 of FIG. 20, the CPU 401 of the performance control unit 400 determines whether or not it has received a reserved number increase command (first reserved number increase command or second reserved number increase command) from the main control unit 100 (see steps S206 and S212 of FIG. 10). If the determination in step S111 is YES, the process proceeds to step S112, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S114.

In step S112, the CPU 401 instructs the image and sound control unit 500 to perform a reserved icon display process, such as a process of additionally displaying a reserved icon indicating a reserved special symbol lottery on the image display unit, in response to the reserved number increase command received in the process of step S111. The displayed reserved icons are erased in order when the notification performance is started based on the process of step S115 described later. The instruction to the image and sound control unit 500 is performed by setting the command in the RAM 403. When the CPU 401 receives the first reserved number increase command, it accumulates and stores one piece of data (first reserved data) indicating the reservation of the first special symbol lottery in the RAM 403 in chronological order, while when the CPU 401 receives the second reserved number increase command, it accumulates and stores one piece of data (second reserved data) indicating the reservation of the second special symbol lottery in chronological order in the RAM 403. At that time, the CPU 401 extracts the advance judgment information included in the reserved number increase command, includes it in each of the reserved data described above, and stores it in the RAM 403. Processing then proceeds to step S113.

In step S113, the CPU 401 performs a pre-reading notice performance setting process. Specifically, when the number of reserved special symbol lotteries (the number of reserved data) stored in the RAM 403 is 2 or more, including the reserved ones added in step S112, the CPU 401 determines whether to execute the pre-reading notice performance by drawing lots or the like, based on the pre-determination information most recently stored in the RAM 403 (i.e., included in the most recent reserved data). For example, the CPU 401 obtains a pre-reading random number (performance random number) in each of the cases where the pre-determination information indicates a "jackpot", a "miss" and a "reach performance" (reach and miss), or a "miss" and a "reach performance without" (reach and miss), and when the pre-reading random number matches a predetermined pre-reading winning value, it decides to execute the pre-reading notice performance. Also, for example, the CPU 401 obtains a look-ahead random number (performance random number) in each of the cases where the pre-determination information indicates a "small win" that leads to a big win, indicates a "miss" and a "reach performance" (reach and miss), or indicates a "miss" and a "no reach performance" (no reach and miss), and if the look-ahead random number matches a predetermined look-ahead winning value, it decides to execute a look-ahead preview performance.

The pre-reading winning value may be set to a different number for the pre-judgment information of "big hit" or "small hit", "miss with reach", and "miss without reach". Specifically, the number of pre-reading winning values for "big hit" or "small hit" may be set to be greater than the number of pre-reading winning values for "miss with reach", so that the pre-reading notice performance is more likely to be executed at the time of "big hit" or "small hit". Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading notice performance, the CPU 401 sets the content of the pre-reading notice performance to be executed by lottery or the like from a number of pre-reading notice performance patterns that satisfy the conditions of this pre-judgment information (such as the condition of whether or not a big hit or a small hit has occurred). In other words, it sets what kind of notice performance will be performed in each notification performance as the pre-reading notice performance. The pre-reading notice performance is, for example, a pre-reading continuous notice performance that can suggest the possibility of a big hit (or a small hit) across multiple notification performances. Processing then proceeds to step S114.

In step S114, the CPU 401 determines whether or not the notification effect start command and the game status notification command set in step S409 of FIG. 11 have been received. If the determination in step S114 is YES, the process proceeds to step S115, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S116.

In step S115, the CPU 401 performs an announcement effect setting process in which, in response to the announcement effect start command received in the process of step S114, the CPU 401 sets the presentation content (presentation pattern) of the announcement effect by the image display unit, etc., and instructs the image and audio control unit 500, etc. to start executing the announcement effect with the set content. Here, the announcement effect (variable presentation; sometimes simply called "variable") is a presentation executed by the image display unit, etc. in response to the variable display of the special pattern, which announces the result of the special pattern lottery, for example, a presentation in which a decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner, and the variable displayed decorative pattern is displayed as a stopped display (confirmed stop display) to announce the result of the special pattern lottery.

Specifically, the CPU 401 analyzes the received notification performance start command and acquires the setting information included in the notification performance start command. Then, the CPU 401 determines the performance pattern corresponding to the variation pattern included in the acquired setting information as the performance pattern of the notification performance to be executed. For example, when the variation pattern included in the setting information is "3" (i.e., when it corresponds to the type of performance pattern "SP Miss"; see FIG. 12, etc.), the CPU 401 determines the SP reach performance to be executed from among the multiple types of SP reach performance by lottery or the like, and after the reach is established and the determined SP reach performance is executed, sets a performance pattern that notifies that the special pattern lottery has been lost, and instructs the image and sound control unit 500, etc. to execute the notification performance with the set content. The CPU 501 of the image and sound control unit 500 creates a schedule for the image and sound performances that constitute the notification performance based on the execution order and execution timing of each performance that constitutes the instructed notification performance, and executes (progresses) the notification performance based on this schedule.

The instruction to the image and sound control unit 500 and the like is performed by setting a command in the RAM 403. In addition, the CPU 401 deletes the first reserved data (oldest first reserved data) stored earliest among the first reserved data stored in chronological order in the RAM 403 when the notification effect set by this notification effect setting process is to notify the result of the first special symbol lottery, and deletes the second reserved data (oldest second reserved data) stored earliest among the second reserved data stored in chronological order in the RAM 403 when the notification effect set by this notification effect setting process is to notify the result of the second special symbol lottery. By processing in this manner, the contents of the random number set information stored in the RAM 103 of the main control unit 100 (reserved data on the main control unit 100 side) can be made to match the contents of the reserved data stored in the RAM 403 of the performance control unit 400 (reserved data on the performance control unit 400 side). After that, the process proceeds to step S116.

In step S116, the CPU 401 determines whether or not it has received the notification effect stop command (symbol determination command) set in the processing of step S412 in FIG. 11. If the determination in step S116 is YES, the processing proceeds to step S117, and if the determination is NO, the processing proceeds to step S118 in FIG. 21.

In step S117, the CPU 401 instructs the image/sound control unit 500 etc. to end the notification effect that was started in response to the processing of step S115, and finally stops all decorative patterns that were being displayed in a variable manner (including temporary stops) completely (displaying them as fixed stops for a specified time (0.5 seconds)) to notify the result of the special pattern lottery in a dramatic manner. Note that each instruction to the image/sound control unit 500 etc. is given by setting a command in the RAM 403. Processing then proceeds to step S118 in FIG. 21.

In step S118 of FIG. 21, the CPU 401 determines whether or not it has received an opening command for the small win game set in the stopped state processing in step S414 of FIG. 11. If the determination in step S118 is YES, the process proceeds to step S119, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S120.

In step S119, the CPU 401 instructs the opening performance of the small win game. Specifically, the CPU 401 instructs the image and sound control unit 500 to start the opening performance of the small win game performance. Here, the opening performance of the small win game is a performance that notifies the start of the small win game, and is, for example, a performance (notification) that displays a performance image and outputs a sound that prompts the player to launch the game ball toward the first large winning hole 50 (i.e., to hit to the right). As already explained, in most cases, the time-limited jackpot game is executed immediately after the small win game, so for example, the performance of the small win game and the performance of the time-limited jackpot game may be executed as one (integrated) jackpot game performance, and the opening performance of the small win game may be executed as the opening performance of the time-limited jackpot game performance. After that, the process moves to step S120.

In step S120, the CPU 401 determines whether or not it has received the round start notification command for the small win game set in the processing of step S605 in FIG. 16. If the determination in step S120 is YES, the processing proceeds to step S121, and if the determination is NO, the processing proceeds to step S122.

In step S121, the CPU 401 issues an instruction to start a round presentation for the small win game. Specifically, the CPU 401 instructs the image and sound control unit 500 and the like to start a round presentation for the small win game presentation. Here, the round presentation for the small win game is a presentation executed during a round of play for the small win game, and is, for example, a presentation (notification) that displays a presentation image and outputs a sound to prompt the player to pass the game ball through a specific area 224 (V area; see FIG. 2) in the first large winning opening 50. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S122.

In step S122, the CPU 401 determines whether or not the specific area passage notification command set in the processing of step S612 in FIG. 16 has been received. If the determination in step S122 is YES, the processing proceeds to step S123, and if the determination is NO, the processing proceeds to step S124.

In step S123, the CPU 401 instructs the specific area passing effect. Specifically, the CPU 401 instructs the image and sound control unit 500 and the like to execute a specific area passing effect that notifies the player that the gaming ball has passed through the specific area 224. Here, the specific area passing effect is an effect that notifies the player that a time-saving jackpot has occurred by notifying the player that the gaming ball has passed through the specific area 224, and is, for example, an effect image display in which the letter V is enlarged and a gold effect is displayed, and sound effects are output. Thereafter, processing proceeds to step S124.

In step S124, the CPU 401 determines whether or not it has received an opening command for the jackpot game set in the processing of step S414 in FIG. 11 or step S622 in FIG. 16. If the determination in step S124 is YES, the processing proceeds to step S125, and if the determination is NO, the processing proceeds to step S126.

In step S125, the CPU 401 instructs the opening performance of the jackpot game. Specifically, the CPU 401 instructs the image and sound control unit 500 and the like to start the opening performance of the jackpot game performance. Here, the opening performance of the jackpot game of the normal jackpot and the time-limited jackpot due to the special pattern lottery winning is a performance that notifies the start of the jackpot game, and is typically an image performance that prompts the player to launch the game ball toward the second large winning hole 56 (i.e., to hit to the right). On the other hand, as already explained, the opening performance of the jackpot game of the time-limited jackpot that occurs when the game ball passes through the specific area 224 during the small jackpot game may be executed as (a part of) the first interval performance of the jackpot game performance, for example (to execute the performance of the small jackpot game and the performance of the time-limited jackpot game as one (integral) jackpot game performance). Processing then proceeds to step S126.

In step S126, the CPU 401 determines whether or not the jackpot game round start notification command set in the processing of step S658 in FIG. 17 has been received. If the determination in step S126 is YES, the processing proceeds to step S127, and if the determination is NO, the processing proceeds to step S128.

In step S127, the CPU 401 issues an instruction to start the round effect of the jackpot game. Specifically, the CPU 401 instructs the image and sound control unit 500 and the like to start the round effect processing of the jackpot game effect. Here, the round effect is an effect executed during the round play of the jackpot game, and is, for example, an effect using an image of the main character fighting an enemy character. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S128.

In step S128, the CPU 401 determines whether or not it has received a winning command that was set in the processing of step S614 in FIG. 16 or step S663 in FIG. 17, and output by the output processing of step S9 in FIG. 9. If the determination in step S128 is YES, the processing proceeds to step S129, and if the determination is NO, the processing proceeds to step S130.

In step S129, the CPU 401 issues a winning processing instruction. Specifically, the CPU 401 instructs the image/sound control unit 500 to start the winning processing. Here, the CPU 501 of the image/sound control unit 500, which has received an instruction to start the winning processing from the performance control unit 400, counts the number of winning balls into each winning hole (first start hole 45, second start hole 47, first large winning hole 50, second large winning hole 56, normal winning hole 43) based on the winning command received via the performance control unit 400, and stores the number in RAM 503. Furthermore, when the CPU 501 receives a winning command based on a game ball entering the large prize opening (i.e., when one game ball enters the large prize opening), it adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the large prize opening, "13", to the total number of prize balls stored in the RAM 503 to update it, and displays the updated total number of prize balls on the main image display unit 70 (for example, as the total number of prize balls during the current jackpot game). After that, the process proceeds to step S130.

In step S130, the CPU 401 determines whether or not the jackpot game round end notification command set in the processing of step S667 in FIG. 17 has been received. If the determination in step S130 is YES, the processing proceeds to step S131, and if the determination is NO, the processing proceeds to step S132.

In step S131, the CPU 401 instructs the image/sound control unit 500 and the like to end the round presentation of the jackpot game presentation. After that, the process proceeds to step S132.

In step S132, the CPU 401 determines whether or not the ending command for the small win game set in the processing of step S618 in FIG. 16 has been received. If the determination in step S132 is YES, the processing proceeds to step S133, and if the determination is NO, the processing proceeds to step S134.

In step S133, the CPU 401 instructs the ending performance of the small win game. Specifically, the CPU 401 instructs the image and audio control unit 500, etc., to execute the ending performance of the small win game performance. As already explained, in most cases, the time-limited jackpot game is executed immediately after the small win game, so for example, the small win game performance and the time-limited jackpot game performance may be executed as one (integrated) jackpot game performance, and the ending performance of the small win game may be executed as part of the first interval performance of the time-limited jackpot game performance. Then, the process proceeds to S134.

In step S134, the CPU 401 determines whether or not the ending command for the jackpot game set in the processing of step S670 in FIG. 18 has been received. If the determination in step S134 is YES, the processing proceeds to step S135, and if the determination is NO, the processing proceeds to step S136.

In step S135, the CPU 401 instructs the ending presentation of the jackpot game. Specifically, the CPU 401 instructs the image/sound control unit 500 and the like to execute the ending presentation of the jackpot game presentation. Here, the ending presentation of the jackpot game presentation is a presentation that notifies the player that the jackpot game has ended, and is typically a presentation that displays the mark of the manufacturer of the gaming machine 1. After that, the process proceeds to S136.

In step S136, the CPU 401 determines whether or not the customer waiting command and the game status notification command set in the processing of step S416 in FIG. 11 have been received. If the determination in step S136 is YES, the processing proceeds to step S137, and if the determination is NO, the command reception processing is terminated and the processing proceeds to step S12 in FIG. 19.

In step S137, the CPU 401 instructs the image and audio control unit 500 to start the stop state processing based on the customer waiting command and the game state notification command received in step S136. Then, the command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S12 in FIG. 19. Here, the stop state processing is a process that is started when the game enters a so-called customer waiting state, and the CPU 501 of the image and audio control unit 500 that is instructed to start the stop state processing displays a predetermined stop effect (for example, an effect in which all decorative patterns are displayed as stopped (confirmed stop display)) according to the game state on the image display unit. Note that the CPU 501 starts the customer waiting effect when a predetermined time (for example, 90 seconds) has elapsed since starting the above-mentioned stop effect, and if no other effect instruction is received from the CPU 401. The customer waiting effect is, for example, an effect in which an image related to the content (anime, story, etc.) that is the subject of the gaming machine 1 is displayed on the image display unit, or an effect in which a part of a predetermined effect (for example, SP reach effect) executed during the game is displayed on the image display unit. However, if the CPU 501 is notified of information indicating that the gaming ball has passed through the gate 44 or that the gaming ball has entered the normal winning hole 43, the CPU 501 will continue the stopped state processing without terminating it.

[Characteristic operation of this embodiment]
Next, in the present embodiment described above using the flowchart, specific examples of notification effects (variable effects) executed by the screen (main image display unit 70, etc.) and speaker 9, etc. will be described.

[Decorative design]
Figures 22 and 23 are figures to explain the decorative pattern DI, which is displayed in a variable manner during the notification performance and then finally displayed as a fixed, stopped pattern, and which is used to dramatically announce the result of the special pattern lottery by the pattern (combination of patterns) displayed as a fixed, stopped pattern.

As shown in FIG. 22, in this embodiment, there are nine types of decorative patterns, each of which depicts the numbers 1 to 9. The decorative patterns depicting 2, 4, 6, and 8 are blue, the decorative patterns depicting 1, 5, and 9 are green, and the decorative patterns depicting 3 and 7 are red. When the decorative patterns depicting 3 or 7 line up (for example, the repeated number 777) and the decorative patterns stop, a time-saving jackpot is suggested in terms of presentation, and when decorative patterns other than 3 and 7 line up (for example, the repeated number 222) and the decorative patterns stop, a normal jackpot is suggested in terms of presentation. As will be described later, there are also patterns (such as consecutive patterns) other than the normal patterns depicting numbers.

FIG. 23 is a specific example of a decorative pattern. In this embodiment, the decorative pattern has a display mode (number character mode) in which a number 701 and a character (character) 302 are surrounded by a frame 700 as shown in FIG. 23(1), and a display mode (number mode) in which only the number 701 is displayed as shown in FIG. 23(2). In the number character mode, the decorative patterns are paired with the number 1 and character A, the number 2 and character B, the number 3 and character C, the number 4 and character D, the number 5 and character E, the number 6 and character F, the number 7 and character G, the number 8 and character H, and the number 9 and character I. In FIG. 23(1), the number 3 and character C are a pair of decorative patterns of the number character mode. In addition, in the decorative pattern of the number character mode exemplified in 23(1), the inner part of the frame is semi-transparent, and the background image of the notification performance, etc. can be seen through.
The decorative pattern of the number character form is not limited to this display form, and for example, a decoration imitating a flower or the like may be added to the frame 700, or for example, there may be no frame 700. The decorative pattern of the number form is not limited to this display form, and for example, a decoration imitating a flower or the like may be added to the number 701.
The display mode of the decorative pattern may be different depending on the game state. For example, the decorative pattern may be a number character mode in the normal game state and a number mode in the time-saving game state, or a number character mode in the time-saving game state and a number mode in the normal game state. Furthermore, the display mode of the decorative pattern may be different depending on the presentation mode (a notification presentation mode (which may be called a stage) that is expressed by changing the background image or the like in the same game state or different game states).

[Outline of the notification display]
Fig. 24 is a specific diagram for explaining the outline of the display of the decorative pattern and the reserved icon in the notification performance (variable performance). First, with reference to Fig. 24, the state in which the decorative pattern DI is displayed variably and then stopped (determined stop display) in order to notify the result of the special pattern lottery will be explained.

In this embodiment, the result of the special pattern lottery is notified in a dramatic manner using a row of three decorative patterns DI1 to DI3. The rows of three decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 are arranged from bottom to top in the order of a pattern with the number 1 drawn to a pattern with the number 9 drawn, and are displayed in a cyclical manner such that the pattern with the number 9 is followed by a pattern with the number 1 drawn. The performance in which the decorative pattern DI is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped (determined stopped) to notify the result of the special pattern lottery is called a notification performance (variable performance). In addition, the notification performance may include the display of various performance images and the output of various performance sounds. For convenience of explanation, in the examples shown in FIG. 24 and subsequent figures, only the reserved icon RI indicating that the first special pattern lottery is reserved is shown, and the reserved icon indicating that the second special pattern lottery is reserved is not shown. In the following, we will use as an example a case where a first special symbol lottery is held and the reserved icon RI indicates that the first special symbol is reserved, but the same applies when a second special symbol lottery is held.

First, as shown in FIG. 24(1), the main image display section 70 displays decorative patterns DI (DI1-DI3), hold icons RI (RI0-RI4), and stages ST (ST0-ST4). The decorative patterns DI are made up of three (three rows) of decorative patterns DI1-DI3, and are displayed on the main image display section 70. More specifically, the left decorative pattern DI1 is displayed on the left side, the right decorative pattern DI2 is displayed on the right side, and the middle decorative pattern DI3 is displayed in the center. The left, right, and middle decorative patterns DI1-DI3 are displayed in a variable manner in accordance with (in synchronization with) the variable display of the special pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24(2), a symbol depicting, for example, the number "2" is temporarily stopped as the left decorative symbol DI1. After that, as shown in FIG. 24(3), a symbol depicting, for example, the number "4" is temporarily stopped as the right decorative symbol DI2. Then, as shown in FIG. 24(4), a symbol depicting, for example, the number "5" is temporarily stopped as the middle decorative symbol DI3, after which the three decorative symbols DI1 to DI3 stop completely (a definite stop is displayed; not shown). At this point, the variable display of the current special symbol ends (the current notification performance ends), the result of the first special symbol lottery is notified to the player, and the reserved icon RI (RI0) on stage ST0 is erased. Specifically, when the decorative pattern DI matches a specific winning pattern (typically a repeat number such as "777"), it is announced that the result of the first special pattern lottery is a jackpot, and when the decorative pattern DI does not match a specific pattern (a losing pattern: typically a random number such as "254"), it is announced that the result of the first special pattern lottery is a loss. Then, as shown in FIG. 24(5), the display of the decorative pattern DI changes in response to the display of the next special pattern. Note that in FIG. 24 and subsequent figures, arrows are used to show the decorative pattern DI changing from top to bottom.

Here, the reserved icon RI is an image for indicating the number of reserved first special symbol lotteries. In addition, the main image display section 70 displays a plurality of stages ST0 to ST4, which are positions where the reserved icon RI is displayed. In FIG. 24(1) to (4), the reserved icons RI (RI1 to RI4) corresponding to the number of times the first special symbol lottery is reserved are displayed above the stages ST1 to ST4, which are arranged in a row in the left and right direction in the lower area of the main image display section 70. In addition, in FIG. 24(1) to (4), the reserved icon RI0, which indicates that the reserved first special symbol lottery has been consumed and the notification performance is being executed, is displayed above the stage ST0. In this way, the reserved icon on the stage ST0 does not indicate the reservation of the special symbol lottery, so it may be called the reserved consumption icon. In addition, since the stage ST0 is a reserved consumption icon stage, it has a different display mode from the other stages RI1 to RI4. In addition, the hold icon (hold completion icon) on stage ST0 may be displayed in a different manner from the hold icons on the other stages RI1 to RI4.

Figure 25 is a diagram showing the colors of reserved icons and the reliability of a jackpot (expected jackpot) suggested by the colors. As shown in Figure 25, a white reserved icon does not suggest a reliability of a jackpot, while blue, green, and red reserved icons suggest a high reliability of a jackpot, with a blue reserved icon suggesting a low reliability of a jackpot, a green reserved icon suggesting a medium reliability of a jackpot, and a red reserved icon suggesting a high reliability of a jackpot. In the figures from Figure 24 onwards, for convenience of illustration, the white color of the reserved icon is indicated with the character "white", the blue color of the reserved icon is indicated with the character "blue", the green color of the reserved icon is indicated with the character "green", and the red color of the reserved icon is indicated with the character "red".

As an example, as shown in FIG. 24(1), stage ST1 displays a hold icon RI1 corresponding to the hold (first hold) for which the first special symbol drawing is scheduled to be performed next (i.e., the oldest stored hold). Stage ST2, located to the left of stage ST1, displays a hold icon RI2 corresponding to the hold (second hold) for which the first special symbol drawing is scheduled to be performed next after the first hold. Stage ST3, located to the left of stage ST2, displays a hold icon RI3 corresponding to the hold (third hold) for which the first special symbol drawing is scheduled to be performed next after the second hold. Stage ST4, located to the left of stage ST3, displays a hold icon RI4 corresponding to the hold (fourth hold) for which the first special symbol drawing is scheduled to be performed next after the third hold.

The reserved icon RI displayed on stage ST0 disappears (is erased) immediately before the current special symbol variable display (i.e., the currently running notification performance) ends. In addition, the reserved icons RI displayed on stages RI1 to RI4 change their display positions (i.e., stages ST) sequentially each time the first special symbol lottery is executed and the notification performance (special symbol variable display) begins. Specifically, when the current special symbol variable display begins (notification performance begins), the reserved icon RI1 displayed on stage ST1 moves from stage ST1 to stage ST0 (i.e., the first reservation is consumed), and the reserved icons RI2 to RI4 displayed on stages ST2 to ST4 move to stages ST1 to ST3, respectively. In this way, the reserved icon RI moves sequentially through the stages ST each time the reservation for the first special symbol lottery is consumed. In this embodiment, the hold icon RI is displayed at a position above the stage ST, but the stage ST may not be displayed and the hold icon RI may be displayed at a specified position (a predetermined position).

As described above, in this embodiment, the lottery result for the reserved first special symbol lottery is notified to the performance control unit 400 from the main control unit 100 before the display of the special symbol in the first special symbol lottery starts to change. In other words, for example, before the first reserved icon RI1 moves from stage ST1 to stage ST0 and the special symbol in the first special symbol lottery starts to change (i.e., the first reserved is consumed), the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery for the first reserved is determined in advance, for example, at the time when the first reserved occurs. In this embodiment, based on this advance determination, a pre-reading suggestion performance (same color chance eye performance, etc.) described later is executed using FIG. 36, etc., so that, for example, the player can be notified in advance that there is a possibility that there is a reserved symbol with a relatively high reliability of winning in the first special symbol lottery, and can be expected to win a jackpot.

[Specific examples of notification effects]
26 and 27 are time charts for explaining specific examples of the notification performance in this embodiment. In each of the time charts of the notification performance shown in FIG. 26 and FIG. 27, the performance content written on the upper side is the performance pattern of the notification performance (in other words, the base performance that constitutes the notification performance), and the performance content written on the lower side (the performance content surrounded by a frame) is the performance content that can be added to this performance pattern. Note that all the performance contents on the upper and lower sides may be considered as the performance pattern of the notification performance.

[Instant miss (variation time 2.00 seconds) notification effect]
Fig. 26 (1) is a time chart of an "instant miss" notification effect with a fluctuation time of 2.00 seconds corresponding to the fluctuation pattern 8 shown in Fig. 12 etc. Fig. 28 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an "instant miss" notification effect with a fluctuation time of 2.00 seconds executed in the time chart of Fig. 26 (1). Below, the notification effect of an instant miss (fluctuation time 2.00 seconds) will be explained with reference to Fig. 26 (1) and Fig. 28.
Here, in the figures from FIG. 28 onwards, it is assumed that a notification effect for notifying the result of the first special symbol lottery is being executed in the normal game state, and unless otherwise specified, it is assumed that a normal background for the normal game state (for example, the background of city A) is displayed in motion (moving display, etc.) as a background image for the decorative symbol, and the display of the normal game background in motion is expressed by writing "(normal background operation)" in the upper left corner of the screen 70. Also, during the execution of the notification effect and during the period when the decorative symbol is displayed as a fixed stop, normal BGM for the normal game state is output from the speaker 9. Note that, when a notification effect is being executed in the time-saving game state, a time-saving background for the time-saving game state (for example, the background of city B) is displayed in motion, and a special BGM for the time-saving game state is output.

First, from the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed as a fixed stop in the number character mode before the notification performance starts (before the change starts) as shown in FIG. 28 (1), at t1 in FIG. 26 (1), the change starts (the notification performance starts) as shown in FIG. 28 (2), and the left decorative pattern DI1, the middle decorative pattern DI3, and the right decorative pattern DI2 are synchronized (synchronized) and a rocking action is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds). The rocking action is an action to indicate that the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (not fixed and stopped). In addition, in conjunction with this rocking action, the left decorative pattern DI1, the middle decorative pattern DI3, and the right decorative pattern DI2 are synchronized (synchronized) and a rocking emphasis performance is performed. Note that, when the normal background action is performed during customer waiting (customer waiting state) when the notification performance is not performed, and when the notification performance is started during customer waiting, the normal background action during customer waiting may be maintained (continued) as it is to start the notification performance.

30 is a diagram for explaining an example of a swinging motion and a swinging emphasis performance. As shown in Fig. 30(1) to (3), the swinging motion is a motion in which the number 701 of the decorative pattern periodically repeats a pendulum motion in which the number 701 rotates counterclockwise around an axis 703 (an axis that is not displayed) by a predetermined angle (e.g., 30°; see Fig. 30(3)) and clockwise by a predetermined angle (e.g., 30°; see Fig. 30(2)).
30(1) to (3), the rocking emphasis effect 304 is an effect that emphasizes the rocking motion, and is an effect that repeatedly changes (periodically moves, etc.) the emphasis area (304) in conjunction with the rocking motion, as if light were periodically reflected on the surface of the decorative pattern number 701. The rocking emphasis effect does not include sound effects.
In addition, when the decorative pattern character 702 or frame 700 executes a rocking motion to perform a predetermined action, the rocking emphasis effect may be an effect in which the emphasis area (304) is repeatedly changed (periodically moved, etc.) in conjunction with the rocking motion, as if light were periodically reflected on the surface of the character 702, etc. Also, while the rocking emphasis effect is not affected by the character action (action) of the fluctuation start emphasis effect (see FIG. 31) as described below, it may be affected by the light emitting effect of the fluctuation start emphasis effect (there may be cases in which visibility is reduced by the light emitting effect).

Next, as shown in FIG. 28 (3), a change start emphasis effect is executed to emphasize the start of the change (scroll) of the decorative pattern row in the order of left decorative pattern DI1, center decorative pattern DI3, and right decorative pattern DI2, and then the change (scroll) of the decorative pattern row begins.

FIG. 31 is a diagram for explaining an example of the change start emphasis performance. First, from the state before the start of the change start emphasis performance shown in FIG. 31 (1) (state in which the swinging action and the swinging emphasis performance are being executed), the change start emphasis performance is started as shown in FIG. 31 (2). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31 (2), the decorative pattern moves slightly in the opposite direction to the direction of change, and the character 702 performs an action (action), and a character action specific to the change start emphasis performance is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 31 (3), during the execution of the character action, the display of the light-emitting effect 305 specific to the change start emphasis performance is started, and then, as shown in FIG. 31 (4), the light-emitting effect 305 spreads and the scroll of the decorative pattern is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 31 (5), during the execution of the character action, the light-emitting effect 305 spreads further and spreads to the outside of the decorative pattern, and the scroll of the decorative pattern is accelerated. Then, as shown in FIG. 31 (6), the visibility of the decorative pattern and the light-emitting effect 305 is reduced by processing such as increasing the transparency of the image, and the decorative pattern is scrolled at a high speed. Also, as shown in Fig. 28 (3), as a variation start emphasis effect, for example, at the timing of Fig. 31 (5), a sound effect "gun" specific to the variation start emphasis effect is output at 1/10 volume from the speaker 9. In this way, the variation start emphasis effect is executed one-off (not repeatedly) to emphasize the start of the variation (scroll) of the decorative pattern row.
In addition, in FIG. 31, an example is given in which the rocking emphasis effect (and rocking motion) is executed during the execution of the change start emphasis effect, but the rocking emphasis effect (and rocking motion) may not be executed during the execution of the change start emphasis effect. In addition, in FIG. 28(3), an example is given in which the left decorative pattern DI1, the middle decorative pattern DI3, and the right decorative pattern DI2 start to change (scroll) in order, but the left decorative pattern DI1, the middle decorative pattern DI3, and the right decorative pattern DI2 may start to change (scroll) simultaneously. In this case, the rocking light-emitting effects of the left decorative pattern DI1, the middle decorative pattern DI3, and the right decorative pattern DI2 are executed simultaneously (synchronized).

Next, as shown in FIG. 28 (4), (the highlighting effect for the start of the change is ended) the decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 on the left, right, and center are displayed (scrolled) at high speed with reduced visibility.

Next, at t2 in FIG. 26(1), as shown in FIG. 29(1), a temporary stop emphasis effect that emphasizes the temporary stop of the left, right, and center decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 is simultaneously executed, and then the left, right, and center decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 are temporarily stopped simultaneously.

Figure 32 is a diagram for explaining an example of a temporary stop emphasis performance. First, as shown in FIG. 32 (1), the visibility of the decorative patterns on the left, right, and center during scrolling improves (for example, the transparency decreases) and the scroll speed decreases. Then, as shown in FIG. 32 (2), the temporary stop emphasis performance starts. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32 (2), the decorative pattern goes slightly past in the direction of the movement (scroll) and then starts a bounding motion to return, and the character 702 moves (acts), and a character action specific to the temporary stop emphasis performance is executed. In addition, in the bounding motion, the character 702 itself may also move once in the direction in which the decorative pattern scrolls and then returns to its original position. Then, as shown in FIG. 32 (3), the character 702 is enlarged during the execution of the character action, and the display of the light-emitting effect 306 specific to the temporary stop emphasis performance starts, and the number 701 is enlarged and rotates once. Then, as shown in FIG. 32 (4), the character 702 and the number 701 during the character action are reduced to their original size, and the light-emitting effect 306 spreads. Then, as shown in FIG. 32(5), while the character action or the like is being performed, the light emitting effect 306 spreads further and reaches the outside of the decorative pattern. Then, as shown in FIG. 32(6), the light emitting effect 306 is reduced and the bounding action ends. Then, as shown in FIG. 32(7), the decorative pattern temporarily stops and a swing emphasis effect is executed. Also, as shown in FIG. 29(5), as a temporary stop emphasis effect, for example, at the timing of FIG. 32(2), a sound effect "thud" specific to the temporary stop emphasis effect is output from the speaker 9 at 1/10 the volume. In this way, the temporary stop emphasis effect is executed one-off (not repeatedly) to emphasize the temporary stop of the decorative pattern row.

In FIG. 32, an example was given in which the rocking emphasis effect (and rocking motion) is not executed during the execution of the temporary stop emphasis effect, but the rocking emphasis effect (and rocking motion) may be executed during the execution of the temporary stop emphasis effect (for example, during the period of FIG. 32 (2) (4) to (6)). In that case, the rocking emphasis effect (and rocking motion) of the left, right, and center decorative patterns may be executed synchronously throughout. In FIG. 29 (5), an example was given in which the left, right, and center decorative patterns are executed simultaneously (synchronized) for the temporary stop emphasis effect and temporarily stopped at the same time, but the left, right, and center decorative patterns may be executed in order for the temporary stop emphasis effect and temporarily stopped in order. In that case, when the rocking emphasis effect (and rocking motion) is executed and the rocking emphasis effect (and rocking motion) started earlier and the rocking emphasis effect (and rocking motion) started later are synchronized, the rocking emphasis effect (and rocking motion) started later (or earlier) may be synchronized discontinuously (not smoothly).

Next, as shown in FIG. 29 (6), the decorative patterns on the left, right, and center are synchronized (harmonized) and a rocking motion is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and in conjunction with this rocking motion, the decorative patterns on the left, right, and center are synchronized (harmonized) to perform a rocking emphasis effect.

Next, at t3 in FIG. 26(1), the left, right, and center decorative symbols that were temporarily stopped are displayed as fixed stops, as shown in FIG. 29(7), and a miss is announced. Note that the decorative symbols that are displayed as fixed stops are completely stopped and do not move, etc.

As described above, according to this embodiment, even in the short (2.00 second) notification of an instant loss that does not give the player the expectation of a big win, the character's actions and the illumination of decorative patterns create dramatic effects to keep the player from getting bored.

[Instant miss (variation time 12.00 seconds) notification effect]
Fig. 26(2) is a time chart of the notification effect of "instant loss" with a fluctuation time of 12.00 seconds corresponding to the fluctuation pattern 7 shown in Fig. 12 etc. Figs. 33 to 35 are diagrams for explaining a specific example of the notification effect of "instant loss" with a fluctuation time of 12.00 seconds executed in the time chart of Fig. 26(2).

As shown in FIG. 26 (2), in the notification effect of "instant miss" with a fluctuation time of 12.00 seconds, any one of the four effects, the reach prompting effect, the pseudo consecutive prompting effect, the same-color chance eye effect, and the hold change effect, can be executed. Therefore, with reference to FIG. 33 and FIG. 34, we will explain the case where the reach prompting effect is executed, the case where the pseudo consecutive prompting effect is executed, and the case where all four effects are not executed. Note that the notification effect may be configured so that two or more of the above four effects can be executed.

First, from the state before the start of the notification performance (before the change starts) shown in FIG. 33(1), at t1 in FIG. 26(2), the decorative pattern row starts changing as shown in FIG. 33(2). Next, as shown in FIG. 33(3), a change start emphasis performance is executed starting from the left decorative pattern, and then the decorative pattern row starts changing (scrolling). Next, as shown in FIG. 33(4), the decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 on the left, right and center are displayed changing (scrolling). The contents of FIG. 33(1) to (4) are the same as the contents of FIG. 28(1) to (4).

Next, at t2 in FIG. 31(2), as shown in FIG. 33(5), a temporary stop emphasis effect (see FIG. 32) is executed to emphasize the temporary stop of the left decorative pattern DI1, and the left decorative pattern DI1 is temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 33 (6), a rocking motion is performed on the left decorative pattern DI1, and in conjunction with this rocking motion, a rocking emphasis effect is performed on the left decorative pattern DI1.

Next, when a reach encouraging effect is executed, at t3 in FIG. 26 (2), as shown in FIG. 33 (7), the right decorative pattern DI2 slows down to encourage (create the expectation that) it will temporarily stop at a pattern that will result in a reach, and a reach encouraging effect (see FIG. 57, etc.) is executed. Also, the swing emphasis effect of the left decorative pattern DI1 continues.

Next, at t4 in Fig. 26(2), as shown in Fig. 33(8), a temporary stop emphasis effect (see Fig. 32) is executed to emphasize the temporary stop of the right decorative symbol DI2 that is not in a reach state, and the right decorative symbol DI2 is temporarily stopped. Also, the swing emphasis effect of the left decorative symbol DI1 is continued.
In addition, when the reach-inducing effect of Fig. 31 (7) is executed, the right decorative symbol DI2 may not be temporarily stopped to emphasize the effect. By doing so, the feeling of the flow of the symbols that are to be reached (afterglow) can be effectively expressed.

If the reach teasing effect is not executed, the effect in Figure 33 (8) will follow after Figure 33 (6).

Next, as shown in FIG. 33 (9), a rocking motion is executed synchronously (in sync) for the left and right decorative patterns, and in conjunction with this rocking motion, a rocking emphasis effect is executed synchronously (in sync) for the left and right decorative patterns. Note that in this case, when the rocking emphasis effect (and rocking motion) of the left decorative pattern DI1 that started first and the rocking emphasis effect (and rocking motion) of the right decorative pattern DI2 that started later are synchronized, the rocking emphasis effect (and rocking motion) of the decorative pattern that started later (or earlier) may be synchronized discontinuously (rather than smoothly).

(If the pseudo consecutive fanning effect is not executed) Next, at t6 in FIG. 26(2), as shown in FIG. 34(4), a temporary stop emphasis effect (see FIG. 32) is executed to emphasize the temporary stop of the middle decorative pattern DI3, and this middle decorative pattern DI3 is temporarily stopped. In addition, the synchronized rocking emphasis effect (and rocking action) of the left and right decorative patterns is also continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 34 (5), the left, right, and center decorative patterns are synchronized (in sync) to perform a rocking motion for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds), and in conjunction with this rocking motion, the left, right, and center decorative patterns are synchronized (in sync) to perform a rocking emphasis effect. Note that in this case, when the rocking emphasis effect (and rocking motion) of the left and right decorative patterns that started first and the rocking emphasis effect (and rocking motion) of the center decorative pattern that started later are synchronized, the rocking emphasis effect (and rocking motion) of the decorative pattern that started later (or earlier) may be synchronized discontinuously (rather than smoothly).

Next, at t7 in FIG. 26 (2), the left, right, and center decorative symbols that were temporarily stopped are displayed as fixed stops, as shown in FIG. 34 (6), and a miss is announced.

On the other hand, when a pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, the effect moves from FIG. 33(6) to FIG. 34(1). In this case, as shown in FIG. 34(1), at t4 in FIG. 26(2), a temporary stop emphasis effect (see FIG. 32) is executed to emphasize the temporary stop of the right decorative pattern DI2 that does not reach a reach, as in FIG. 33(8), and this right decorative pattern DI2 is temporarily stopped. In addition, the swing emphasis effect of the left decorative pattern DI1 is also continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 34 (2), similar to FIG. 33 (9), the left and right decorative patterns are synchronously rocked and rocking emphasis is performed.

Next, at t5 in FIG. 26 (2), as shown in FIG. 34 (3), a pseudo-ren-triggering effect (see FIG. 57, etc.) is executed, which encourages a temporary stop of a repeat pattern (a special decorative pattern that is different from normal decorative patterns and can notify the execution of a pseudo-ren performance by temporarily stopping) in which the character "ren" is drawn as the middle decorative pattern DI3.

As already explained, thereafter, at t6 in FIG. 26(2), the middle decorative pattern DI3 temporarily stops as shown in FIG. 34(4), then the left, right, and middle decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 synchronize (synchronize) as shown in FIG. 34(5), and at t7 in FIG. 26(2), the left, right, and middle decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 are displayed as definitely stopped as shown in FIG. 34(6), and a miss is announced.
In addition, when the pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, the temporary stop emphasizing effect of the middle decorative pattern DI3 may not be executed. By doing so, the feeling that the consecutive patterns flow (afterglow) can be effectively expressed.
Also, in the above, in the notification performance of an immediate loss, the mode in which the left, right, and center decorative patterns temporarily stop at the same time (FIG. 29(5)), and the mode in which the decorative patterns temporarily stop in a fixed order of left, right, and center (FIGS. 33(5)(8), 34(4), etc.) have been described. However, the order in which the decorative patterns temporarily stop is not limited to this, and for example, the order in which the decorative patterns temporarily stop may be different each time, or they may temporarily stop in a random order each time, or the left and right decorative patterns may temporarily stop at the same time.

Next, referring to Figures 35 to 37, we will explain the cases where a same-color chance eye effect is executed and a reserve change effect is executed in the notification effect of "regular instant miss" with a fluctuation time of 12.00 seconds (see Figure 26 (2)).

First, from the state before the start of the notification performance (before the change starts) shown in FIG. 35(1), at t1 in FIG. 26(2), the decorative pattern row starts changing as shown in FIG. 35(2). Next, as shown in FIG. 35(3), a change start emphasis performance is executed starting from the left decorative pattern, and then the decorative pattern row starts changing (scrolling). Next, as shown in FIG. 35(4), the decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 on the left, right and center are displayed changing (scrolling). The contents of FIG. 35(1) to (4) are the same as the contents of FIG. 28(1) to (4).

Next, at t2 in Fig. 26(2), the left decorative symbol is temporarily stopped as shown in Fig. 35(5), and then a swinging emphasis effect is produced for the left decorative symbol as shown in Fig. 35(6). Then, at t4 in Fig. 26(2), the right decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at a symbol that does not result in a win as shown in Fig. 35(7), and then the left and right decorative symbols are synchronized (harmonized) to produce a swinging emphasis effect as shown in Fig. 35(8). The contents of Figs. 35(5)-(8) are the same as the contents of Figs. 33(5),(6),(8),(9).

Next, at t6 in FIG. 26(2), as shown in FIG. 35(9), the center decorative pattern DI3 is temporarily stopped at a pattern that results in a blue chance eye, and a blue chance eye emphasis effect is performed for the left, right, and center decorative patterns DI1 to DI3. Also, during the execution of the chance eye emphasis effect, the left, right, and center decorative patterns are synchronously (synchronized) with each other to perform a swinging motion and a swinging emphasis effect. The chance eye emphasis effect is an effect that suggests (or emphasizes) that the reliability of a jackpot in the later notification effect (later fluctuation) is relatively high by emphasizing the same-color chance eye, and includes character motion, light-emitting effects, sound effects, etc., that are unique to the chance eye emphasis effect. Also, since the chance eye emphasis effect is performed when all the left, right, and center decorative patterns are temporarily stopped, it can be considered as a type of temporary stop emphasis effect, and can also be considered as an emphasis effect on a larger scale than the normal temporary stop emphasis effect (FIG. 32). Here, in order for the blue chance eye to be established, it is necessary for all the left, right, and center decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 to be temporarily stopped at blue patterns (see FIG. 22). In addition, when the middle decorative pattern DI3 temporarily stops in FIG. 35 (9), the same effect as in FIG. 34 (4) (temporary stop highlight effect of the middle decorative pattern DI3) may be executed once, and then the blue chance eye highlight effect may be executed as described above. In addition, when the left, right, and center decorative patterns temporarily stop at the same time, the left, right, and center decorative patterns may be simultaneously executed with the temporary stop highlight effect, and then the blue chance eye highlight effect may be executed as described above. In addition, the middle decorative pattern DI3 may be configured to perform a same-color chance eye teasing effect (and a same-color chance eye teasing emphasis effect that emphasizes this effect) that encourages the temporary stop at a pattern that achieves the same-color chance eye (blue chance eye in FIG. 35) by slowing down the speed of the middle decorative pattern DI3. Furthermore, if the same-color chance eye is not achieved after the execution of the same-color chance eye teasing effect, the temporary stop highlight effect of the middle decorative pattern DI3 may not be executed. In this way, the feeling of the same-color chance eye flowing (afterglow) can be effectively expressed.

Next, at t7 in Figure 26 (2), as shown in Figure 35 (10), the decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 on the left, right, and center that were temporarily stopped are displayed as definitely stopped after the blue chance eye highlighting effect ends and the character returns to its basic position, and a miss is announced.

Figure 36 is a specific diagram for explaining the types of same-color chance eye effects and chance eye emphasis effects. The same-color chance eye effects include a blue chance eye effect (Figure 36 (1)) in which the left, right, and center decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 temporarily stop on a blue pattern (see Figure 27), a green chance eye effect (Figure 36 (2)) in which they temporarily stop on a green pattern, and a red chance eye effect (Figure 36 (3)) in which they temporarily stop on a red pattern (see Figure 22). In addition, there are blue chance eye emphasis effects that include a unique character action, blue light-emitting effect, and sound effect "Giin" (volume 6/10) that emphasizes the blue chance eye effect, a green chance eye emphasis effect that includes a unique character action, green light-emitting effect, and sound effect "Gigigiin" (volume 8/10) that emphasizes the green chance eye effect, and a red chance eye emphasis effect that includes a unique character action, red light-emitting effect, and sound effect "Gigiin" (volume 7/10) that emphasizes the red chance eye effect. In addition, the reliability of a green chance eye effect in a jackpot in a later notification effect is higher than that of a blue chance eye effect, and the reliability of a red chance eye effect in a jackpot in a later notification effect is higher than that of a green chance eye effect. In addition, when same-color chance eye effects are executed across multiple notification effects, multiple same-color chance eyes are executed so that the reliability of a jackpot does not decrease.

On the other hand, when the reserved change performance is executed, the performance shifts from FIG. 35 (8) to FIG. 37 (1). In this case, at t6 in FIG. 26 (2), as shown in FIG. 37 (1), a strange pattern (a special decorative pattern that is different from a normal decorative pattern and can inform the user that the reserved icon will change to a state that suggests a high probability of winning by temporarily stopping it) with the character "Hen" drawn as the middle decorative pattern DI3 is temporarily stopped, and a reserved change emphasis performance is executed. The reserved change emphasis performance is a performance that emphasizes the reserved icon when executing a reserved change performance in which the reserved icon that is the target of the pre-reading suggestion changes to a state that suggests a high probability of winning, and includes a unique action, a light-emitting effect, and a sound effect. In FIG. 37(1), when the reserved icon RI2, which is the subject of the pre-reading suggestion, changes from white to green, which indicates a high probability of a jackpot, a unique action such as lightning flashing toward the reserved icon RI2 is performed, a unique lighting effect is displayed on the reserved icon RI2, and a unique sound effect of "battery bang" (volume 7/10) is output.

Here, the reserved change effects include a blue reserved change effect (not shown) in which the reserved icon changes to blue, a green reserved change effect (Fig. 38 (1)) in which the reserved icon changes to green, and a red reserved change effect (not shown) in which the reserved icon changes to red. In addition, there are blue reserved change emphasis effects including a unique action, light-emitting effect, and sound effect "bari" (volume 6/10) that emphasizes the blue reserved change effect, green reserved change emphasis effects including a unique action, light-emitting effect, and sound effect "bari bari" (volume 7/10) that emphasizes the green reserved change effect, and red reserved change emphasis effects including a unique action, light-emitting effect, and sound effect "bari bari bari" (volume 8/10) that emphasizes the red reserved change effect (see Fig. 59, etc.). In addition, the green reserved change effect has a higher jackpot reliability than the blue reserved change effect, and the red reserved change effect has a higher jackpot reliability than the green reserved change effect. In addition, when the reserved change effect is executed across multiple notification effects, multiple reserved change effects are executed so that the jackpot reliability does not decrease.

Next, as shown in FIG. 37 (2), after the variable pattern is switched to the normal decorative pattern, the left, right, and center decorative patterns are synchronously rocked and rocking emphasis is performed, similar to FIG. 34 (5) etc.

Next, as shown in FIG. 37(3), at t7 in FIG. 26(2), the decorative symbols DI1 to DI3 on the left, right, and center that had been temporarily stopped are displayed as definitely stopped, and a miss is announced. Note that in FIG. 37(1), a reserved change prompting effect (and a reserved change prompting emphasis effect that emphasizes this effect) may be performed by slowing down the variable symbol to prompt the player that the variable symbol has temporarily stopped. Furthermore, if the variable symbol does not temporarily stop after the reserved change prompting effect is performed, a reserved stop emphasis effect of the normal decorative symbol that switches from the variable symbol may not be performed. In this way, the feeling that the reserved change effect has flowed (afterglow) can be effectively expressed.

[Notification of reach miss/reach hit (variable time 15.00 seconds)]
Fig. 26(3) is a time chart of the notification effect of "reach miss"/"reach hit" with a fluctuation time of 15.00 seconds corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number 5/6 shown in Fig. 12 etc. Fig. 38 to Fig. 47 are figures for explaining a specific example of the notification effect of "reach miss"/"reach hit" with a fluctuation time of 15.00 seconds executed in the time chart of Fig. 26(3).

First, from the state before the start of the notification performance (before the change starts) shown in FIG. 38(1), at t1 in FIG. 26(3), the decorative pattern row starts changing as shown in FIG. 38(2). Next, as shown in FIG. 38(3), a change start emphasis performance is executed starting from the left decorative pattern, and then the decorative pattern row starts changing (scrolling). Next, as shown in FIG. 38(4), the decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 on the left, right and center are displayed changing (scrolling). The contents of FIG. 38(1) to (4) are the same as the contents of FIG. 28(1) to (4).

Next, as shown in FIG. 38 (5), when a cut-in preview performance is executed, at t2 in FIG. 26 (3) (e.g., 2 seconds after the start of the notification performance), a blue cut-in preview performance in which a blue cut-in image 309 depicting "Is it hot?" is displayed and a blue cut-in preview emphasis performance are executed. The cut-in preview emphasis performance is a performance that emphasizes the cut-in preview performance, and includes a unique lighting effect and sound effect. It may also include a unique action (e.g., the action of the cut-in image, etc.).

Here, the cut-in preview effects include a blue cut-in preview effect in which a blue cut-in image with the words "Hot?" is displayed (see FIG. 38 (5)), a green cut-in preview effect in which a green cut-in image with the words "Hot!!" is displayed (see FIG. 49 (5)), and a red cut-in preview effect in which a red cut-in image with the words "Super hot!!" is displayed (see FIG. 52 (2)). The blue cut-in preview emphasis effect is an effect that emphasizes the blue cut-in preview effect and includes a unique light-emitting effect and sound effect "Zubaban" (volume 5/10), the green cut-in preview emphasis effect is an effect that emphasizes the green cut-in preview effect and includes a unique light-emitting effect and sound effect "Zubaban" (volume 6/10), and the red cut-in preview emphasis effect is an effect that emphasizes the red cut-in preview effect and includes a unique light-emitting effect and sound effect "Zubaban" (volume 7/10) (see FIG. 59, etc.). In addition, the reliability of hitting the jackpot with the currently running notification effect is higher for the green cut-in notification effect than for the blue cut-in notification effect, and higher for the red cut-in notification effect than for the green cut-in notification effect.

After Fig. 38(4) or (5), (if a pseudo consecutive performance is executed) at t3 in Fig. 26(3), the left decorative symbol is temporarily stopped as shown in Fig. 38(6), and then a swinging emphasis performance of the left decorative symbol is performed as shown in Fig. 38(7). Then, at t4 in Fig. 26(3), the right decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at a symbol that does not result in a reach as shown in Fig. 38(8), and then the left and right decorative symbols are synchronized (harmonized) to perform a swinging emphasis performance as shown in Fig. 39(1). The contents of Figs. 38(6)-(8) and Fig. 39(1) are the same as the contents of Figs. 33(5),(6),(8),(9).

Next, at t5 in FIG. 26 (3), as shown in FIG. 39 (2), a pseudo consecutive promotion effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 34 (3).

Next, as shown in FIG. 39 (3), the consecutive symbols temporarily stop as the middle decorative symbol DI3, and a pseudo consecutive highlight effect is executed. The pseudo consecutive highlight effect is an effect that emphasizes the temporary stop of the consecutive symbols, which suggests the execution of a pseudo consecutive, and includes a unique action, a light-emitting effect, and a "clack" sound effect (volume 7/10).

Figures 41 and 42 are diagrams each illustrating an example of a pseudo-repeated pattern highlighting effect. For example, as shown in Figures 41(1) to (3), when the consecutive patterns temporarily stop, in the pseudo-repeated pattern highlighting effect, a X-shaped light-emitting effect 309 (a unique light-emitting effect) is displayed that spreads out from the center of the consecutive patterns until it can be seen off the screen. Also, as shown in Figures 42(1) to (3), when the consecutive patterns temporarily stop, in the pseudo-repeated pattern highlighting effect, the consecutive patterns are enlarged until they can be seen off the screen, and the light-emitting effect 309 spreads out from the center of the consecutive patterns until it can be seen off the screen.

Next, at t6 in FIG. 26 (3), the left, right, and center decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 that were temporarily stopped are re-fluctuated as shown in FIG. 39 (4), and the pseudo consecutive performance is executed (completed). Note that since this re-fluctuation is a pseudo re-fluctuation, the fluctuation start emphasis performance (see FIG. 31) is not executed at the time of the re-fluctuation. Also, the pseudo consecutive promotion performance in FIG. 39 (2) may not be executed. Also, the performance in FIG. 39 (2) where the consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped and the performance in FIG. 39 (4) where the decorative patterns that were temporarily stopped are re-fluctuated may be considered as a pseudo consecutive performance.

The pseudo consecutive performance sets described using Figures 38 (6)-(8) and Figures 39 (1)-(4) can be executed up to three times in one notification performance (one change), and the more times they are executed, the higher the reliability of a jackpot in the currently executing notification performance. Therefore, when executing one or two more pseudo consecutive performance sets, a pseudo consecutive performance set is executed as shown in Figure 39 (5). Note that at least a portion of the pseudo consecutive performance highlighting effects may be different in each set of pseudo consecutive performances.

Next, at t7 in FIG. 26(3), as shown in FIG. 39(6), the same effect as in FIG. 33(5) is executed and the left decorative pattern DI1 is temporarily stopped. If no pseudo consecutive effect is executed here, the effect moves from FIG. 38(4) or (5) to FIG. 39(6).

Next, when a reach prompting effect is executed, at t8 in FIG. 26 (3), as shown in FIG. 39 (8), the reach prompting effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 33 (7).

After Figure 39 (7) or (8), at t9 in Figure 26 (3), as shown in Figure 40 (1), the right decorative pattern DI2 temporarily stops at a pattern that indicates a reach is reached (i.e., a reach is reached), and a reach-achieved highlighting effect is executed. The reach-achieved highlighting effect is an effect that emphasizes the reach being reached (reach eye), and includes unique character movements, lighting effects, and the sound effect "Zugyuun" (volume 7/10) (see Figure 59, etc.). In addition, the left and right decorative patterns (reach eyes) that have been reached are synchronized (harmonized) to perform a swinging highlighting effect.

Figure 43 is a diagram for explaining an example of a reach-established highlighting effect. For example, as shown in Figure 43 (1), in the reach-established highlighting effect, a unique character action (action) is performed on the left and right decorative patterns (reach eyes) where the reach has been established, and a line-shaped unique light-emitting effect 310 that simultaneously straddles (connects) the reach eyes is displayed. Also, for example, as shown in Figure 43 (2), in the reach-established highlighting effect, a unique character action (action) is performed on the reach eyes, and a unique light-emitting effect 310 that simultaneously straddles and covers the reach eyes is displayed. Also, for example, as shown in Figure 43 (3), in the reach-established highlighting effect, a unique character action (action) is performed on the reach eyes, and a unique band-shaped light-emitting effect 310 in which the characters "Reach!!" move from left to right, which simultaneously straddles the reach eyes, is displayed. Note that when the right decorative pattern DI2 is temporarily stopped on a pattern where the reach is established (similar to Figure 33 (8) etc.), a temporary stop highlighting effect may be executed once, and then the reach-established highlighting effect may be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40 (2), the left and right decorative patterns (reach eyes) are enlarged while a synchronized (synchronized) swing emphasis effect is performed, and they also move apart to the left and right. Note that the reach eyes may be enlarged until they are no longer visible on the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40 (3), the central decorative pattern is enlarged to a pattern that indicates a jackpot (a pattern that results in a repeating number), and the speed slows down to induce (create the expectation of) a temporary stop, leading to a jackpot stop teasing effect (and a jackpot stop teasing emphasis effect that emphasizes this effect; see FIG. 61, etc.).

Next, in the case of a miss, at t10 in FIG. 26 (3), as shown in FIG. 40 (4), the same effect as in FIG. 35 (4) is executed, and the middle decorative pattern DI3 temporarily stops at a pattern that is a miss, and a temporary stop emphasis effect is executed. Note that this temporary stop emphasis effect (temporary stop emphasis effect of a reach miss) may be an effect different from the normal temporary stop emphasis effect (see FIG. 32, etc.). Specifically, the character movement, light emission effect, etc. may be a unique effect, or it may be a smaller effect (than the normal temporary stop emphasis effect). Furthermore, it may be configured not to execute the temporary stop emphasis effect. In this way, it is possible to leave the player with a sense of expectation that a revival hit effect (not shown) will be executed, in which the middle decorative pattern DI3 will fluctuate again and then temporarily stop at a pattern that is a jackpot, resulting in a jackpot. In that case, it is desirable to configure this revival hit effect to be executable with a low probability (for example, 1% of the jackpot). In addition, this temporary stop emphasis effect (a temporary stop emphasis effect for a missed reach) can be considered as a missed reach emphasis effect that emphasizes a missed reach (see Figure 59, etc.).

Next, as shown in FIG. 40 (5), the decorative patterns on the left, right, and center are reduced to their original size, and a synchronized (synchronized) swing emphasis effect is executed.

Next, at t11 in FIG. 26 (3), as shown in FIG. 40 (6), the decorative symbols on the left, right, and center are displayed as confirmed stops with a reach miss, and a miss is announced.

On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot, at t10 in FIG. 26(3), as shown in FIG. 40(7), the center decorative symbol DI3 temporarily stops on the symbol (double number) that will result in a jackpot, and a double number highlighting effect is executed. The double number highlighting effect is an effect that emphasizes the jackpot symbol (double number), and includes unique character movements, light-emitting effects, and a "thud" sound effect (volume 8/10). In addition, a swinging highlighting effect is executed in synchronization (harmonized) with the temporarily stopped decorative symbols in the left, right, and center.

Figures 44 and 45 are diagrams each illustrating an example of a doublet highlighting effect. For example, as shown in Figures 44 (1) to (3), in a doublet highlighting effect, a unique character action is performed on the left and right center decorative symbols (doublets), and a cross light-emitting effect 311 (unique light-emitting effect) is displayed, spreading from the center of the center decorative symbol until it can be seen off the screen. Also, as shown in Figures 45 (1) to (3), in a doublet highlighting effect, a unique character action is performed on the left and right center decorative symbols (doublets), and a number of cross light-emitting effects 311 (unique light-emitting effects) are displayed, spreading from multiple positions on the left and right center decorative symbols until they can be seen off the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40 (8), in the temporary stop state, a pattern confirmation suggestion highlight effect is executed to indicate that the left, right, and center decorative patterns are confirmed. The pattern confirmation suggestion highlight effect is an effect that highlights the winning pattern (double number), and includes a unique light emitting effect and a sound effect "kin" (volume 2/10). In addition, a swaying highlight effect is executed (continued) in synchronization (harmonized) with the temporarily stopped left, right, and center decorative patterns. In addition, the pattern confirmation suggestion highlight effect may include a unique action effect (character action, etc.). In addition, the swaying highlight effect may end before the pattern confirmation suggestion highlight effect is executed.

Figures 46 and 47 are diagrams showing examples of the pattern confirmation suggestion emphasis effect. As shown in (1) → (2) → (3) of Figure 42, the pattern confirmation suggestion emphasis effect is an emphasis effect in which the light-emitting effect 312 that appears to be reflective and shining moves, for example, from bottom to top. By executing the pattern confirmation suggestion emphasis effect in this way, the decorative pattern that is oscillating in a provisionally stopped state can be made to look as if it has been confirmed and completely stopped, even though it is oscillating. Here, the pattern confirmation suggestion emphasis effect is an important effect that suggests that the decorative pattern will definitely stop at a pattern (double number) that indicates a jackpot, and since it suggests that various effects that make you expect a jackpot have ended and the jackpot has finally been confirmed, it is a small-scale effect (plain) effect. Therefore, the pattern confirmation suggestion emphasis effect is not executed simultaneously with various emphasis effects that make you expect a jackpot (cut-in emphasis effect, pseudo-successive emphasis effect, reach establishment emphasis effect, SP development emphasis effect, etc.). Also, for example, as shown in (1), (2), and (3) of FIG. 47, the pattern confirmation suggestion highlight effect is a very large-scale highlight effect in which the light-emitting effect 312 spreads from the center decorative pattern DI3 until it finally covers the entire screen for an instant (for example, until the decorative patterns on the left, right, and center become difficult to distinguish or cannot be distinguished).

Next, at t11 in FIG. 26 (3), as shown in FIG. 40 (9), the decorative symbols DI1 to DI3 that were temporarily stopped on the left, right, and center are reduced to their original size and displayed as definitely stopped, and a jackpot is announced.

[Notification of SP miss/SP win (variable time 60.00 seconds)]
Fig. 27(1) is a time chart of the notification effect of "SP miss"/"SP hit" with a fluctuation time of 60.00 seconds corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number 3/4 shown in Fig. 12 etc. Fig. 48 to Fig. 51 are diagrams for explaining a specific example of the notification effect of "SP miss"/"SP hit" with a fluctuation time of 60.00 seconds executed in the time chart of Fig. 27(1).

First, from t1 to t6 in Figure 27 (1) (precisely, up to before t7), as shown in Figure 48 (1), after the fluctuation starts, it is possible to execute a cut-in preview effect and up to three sets of pseudo consecutive effects, similar to the effects in Figures 38 (1) to 39 (5).

Next, when a specific result prediction effect is executed, as shown in Figures 48 (2) to (5), an effect similar to that of Figures 33 (5), (6), (8), and (9) is executed, in which the left decorative pattern DI1 temporarily stops, and then the right decorative pattern DI2 temporarily stops with a pattern that does not result in a reach, and the left and right decorative patterns are synchronized (harmonized) to execute a swing emphasis effect.

After that, at t7 in FIG. 27(1), as shown in FIG. 48(6), the middle decorative pattern DI3 temporarily stops with the same blue pattern as the left and right decorative patterns, and the left and right middle decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 achieve a blue specific result (see FIG. 22), and a blue specific result highlighting effect is executed. The specific result highlighting effect is an effect that emphasizes the achievement of a specific result and indicates the expectation of a zone effect being executed (expectation of entering a zone) in the currently executed notification effect, and includes a unique character action (action), a light-emitting effect (blue light emission), and a sound effect "Queen" (volume 6/10). Note that when the middle decorative pattern DI3 temporarily stops, an effect similar to that in FIG. 34(4) (temporary stop highlighting effect of the middle decorative pattern DI3) may be executed, and then the blue specific result highlighting effect may be executed as described above. In addition, the specific result highlighting effect may be considered to be an effect that emphasizes the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, and may be considered to be a type of temporary stop highlighting effect that is larger in scale than the normal temporary stop highlighting effect.

Here, the specific result highlighting effects include a blue specific result highlighting effect (Fig. 48 (6)) when the left, right, and center decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 all temporarily stop at blue patterns (see Fig. 22), a green specific result highlighting effect (not shown) when the left, right, and center decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 all temporarily stop at green patterns, and a red specific result highlighting effect (not shown) when the left, right, and center decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 all temporarily stop at red patterns. The blue specific result highlighting effect includes a unique character action, a light-emitting effect (blue light-emitting), and a sound effect "Queen" (volume 6/10), the green specific result highlighting effect includes a unique character action, a light-emitting effect (green light-emitting), and a sound effect "Queen" (volume 7/10), and the red specific result highlighting effect includes a unique character action, a light-emitting effect (green light-emitting), and a sound effect "Queen" (volume 8/10). In addition, the expected probability of entering the zone is higher with a green specific result emphasis effect than with a blue specific result emphasis effect, and the expected probability of entering the zone is higher with a red specific result emphasis effect than with a green specific result emphasis effect. In addition, when a specific result emphasis effect is executed multiple times in one notification effect, multiple specific result emphasis effects are executed so that the expected probability of entering the zone does not decrease.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (7), the left, right, and center decorative symbols that were temporarily stopped in the specific result highlighting effect are changed again. Note that since this change again is a pseudo change, it is preferable that the change start highlighting effect is not executed when the change again occurs, but it may be executed.

Next, if one or two more sets of the specific result highlighting effects (specific result announcement) described using Figures 48 (2) to (7) are to be executed, a set of specific result highlighting effects is executed as shown in Figure 48 (8).

Next, if the zone effect is not executed, at t9 to t11 in FIG. 27(1), as shown in FIG. 49(1) to (4), the same effects as those in FIG. 39(6) to (8) and FIG. 40(1) are executed, in which the left decorative pattern DI1 temporarily stops and a reach-inducing effect is executed, followed by a right decorative pattern DI2 temporarily stopping and a reach being established effect. Note that if the specific result highlighting effect is not executed, the effect moves from FIG. 48(1) to FIG. 49(1).

Next, when a cut-in preview performance is to be executed, as shown in FIG. 49(5), a cut-in preview performance is executed at t12 in FIG. 27(1), similar to FIG. 38(5). Note that in FIG. 49(5), a green cut-in preview performance is executed.

On the other hand, when executing the zone effect, at t8 in FIG. 27(1), as shown in FIG. 50(1), the zone effect is started and the zone entry emphasis effect is executed. The zone effect is an effect that suggests a high reliability of a jackpot in the currently executed notification effect, and is an effect that displays a band image that displays a moving text image of the zone effect background and "weak zone" or "strong zone". In addition, the zone effect that displays the band image of the "strong zone" has a higher reliability of a jackpot than the zone effect that displays the band image of the "weak zone". In FIG. 50(1), the zone effect that displays the band image of the "weak zone" is executed. In addition, the SP reach effect starts with the end of the zone effect. In addition, the zone entry emphasis effect is an effect that emphasizes the zone effect, and includes a unique light-emitting effect (for example, the light-emitting effect of the zone background) and a sound effect "Gween" (volume 7/10). In addition, a unique action (for example, the action of the band image) may be included. In addition, the zone entry emphasis effect may be different for the weak zone and the strong zone. Additionally, when the zone effect ends, another effect that increases the expectation of a big win (for example, an SPSP reach effect) may begin.

Next, from t9 to t12 in FIG. 27 (1), as shown in FIG. 50 (1) to (5), a similar effect to FIG. 49 (1) to (5) is executed while executing the zone effect, and after the left decorative pattern DI1 temporarily stops, if a reach prompting effect is executed, the reach prompting effect is executed, and then, if a reach is established and a cut-in notice effect is executed, the cut-in notice effect is executed. Note that in FIG. 50 (5), a green cut-in notice effect is executed.

After Fig. 49 (4) (5) or Fig. 50 (4) (5), at t13 in Fig. 27 (1), the SP reach performance is developed as shown in Fig. 51 (1). Specifically, an SP reach background dedicated to the SP reach performance (for example, a background during an SP battle in which the protagonist character fights an enemy character) is displayed, and an SP development emphasis performance is executed to emphasize that the performance has developed into an SP reach performance. The SP development emphasis performance is a performance in which a unique light-emitting effect is displayed that causes the SP reach background to be illuminated on a large scale (for example, the entire display screen is illuminated), and a unique sound effect "Gyuuun" (volume 8/10) is output (see Fig. 63, etc.). At that time, the decorative pattern is changed from the number character form to the number form (see Fig. 23) and is displayed in a reduced size at a distance from the top of the screen, and a swing emphasis performance is executed (continued) in synchronization with the decorative pattern (reach eye) in the number form.

Next, in the case of a miss, at t14 in FIG. 27(1), as shown in FIG. 51(2), an image of the SP battle defeat in the SP reach background is displayed, and an SP defeat emphasis effect is executed on the SP reach background, etc. The SP defeat emphasis effect is an effect that emphasizes that the result of the SP reach is a miss (SP battle defeat), and for example, a unique light-emitting effect that partially lights up the SP reach background on a small scale (for example, the central area of the display screen lights up) is displayed, and a unique sound effect "Zoon" (volume 7/10) is output (see FIG. 63, etc.). This unique sound effect also serves as the sound effect of the temporary stop emphasis effect of the middle decorative pattern DI3 that is temporarily stopped with the pattern that is a miss. Also, as shown in FIG. 51(2), in this temporary stop emphasis effect, a small-scale unique light-emitting effect is displayed on the middle decorative pattern DI3. Note that the swing emphasis effect is not executed on the temporarily stopped middle decorative pattern DI3. Here, when the intermediate decorative pattern DI3 temporarily stops on a pattern that is a losing combination, the light emitting effect of the temporary stop highlighting effect is not displayed for the intermediate decorative pattern DI3, so that the player can be left with a sense of expectation that the intermediate decorative pattern DI3 will change again and then temporarily stop on a pattern that is a winning combination, resulting in a revival winning combination (not shown). For this reason, it is desirable to configure the revival winning combination to be executable with a low probability (for example, 1% of the cases where a jackpot occurs).

Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (3), the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped is returned from the number form to the number character form (see FIG. 23) and enlarged, and a swing emphasis effect is executed in synchronization (synchronization) with the decorative patterns on the left, right, and center.

Next, at t15 in FIG. 27(1), as shown in FIG. 51(4), the left, right, and center decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 that were temporarily stopped are reduced to their original size and displayed as fixed stops, and a miss is announced.

On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot, at t14 in FIG. 27(1), as shown in FIG. 50(5), an image of the SP battle victory in which the SP battle has been won is displayed in the SP reach background, and an SP victory emphasis effect is executed on the SP reach background, etc. The SP victory emphasis effect is an effect that emphasizes that the result of the SP reach is a jackpot (SP battle victory), and for example, a unique lighting effect is displayed that causes the entire SP reach background to light up on a large scale (for example, the entire display screen lights up), and a unique sound effect "Tadaaaaa" (sound 9/10) is output (see FIG. 63, etc.).

At t14 in FIG. 27(1), as shown in FIG. 50(5), the middle decorative pattern DI3 temporarily stops at a pattern that is a jackpot, and a special temporary stop emphasis effect is executed for the middle decorative pattern DI3. In this special temporary stop emphasis effect (temporary stop emphasis effect when a doublet is formed), an effect different from the normal temporary stop emphasis effect (FIG. 32) is executed, and for example, a special light-emitting effect is displayed. In addition, a swing emphasis effect is not executed for the temporarily stopped middle decorative pattern DI3. Note that, when the middle decorative pattern DI3 temporarily stops at a pattern that is a jackpot, the temporary stop emphasis effect may not be executed, and the above-mentioned special sound effect "ta-dah" may not be output. In addition, a swing emphasis effect may be executed for the temporarily stopped middle decorative pattern DI3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (6), the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped is returned from the number form to the number character form (see FIG. 23) and enlarged, and a performance emphasizing the formation of the doublet is executed (see FIG. 44, FIG. 45, FIG. 61, etc.).

Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (7), similar to FIG. 40 (8), a pattern confirmation suggestion highlighting effect is executed for the decorative patterns on the left, right, and center (see FIG. 46, FIG. 47, FIG. 61, etc.).

Next, at t15 in FIG. 27(1), as shown in FIG. 51(8), the decorative symbols DI1 to DI3 that were temporarily stopped on the left, right, and center are reduced to their original size and displayed as definitely stopped, and a jackpot is announced.

[Notification of SPSP miss/SPSP hit (variable time 90.00 seconds)]
Fig. 27(2) is a time chart of the notification effect of "SPSP miss"/"SPSP hit" with a fluctuation time of 90.00 seconds corresponding to the fluctuation pattern 1/2 shown in Fig. 12 etc. Fig. 52 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the notification effect of "SPSP miss"/"SPSP hit" with a fluctuation time of 90.00 seconds executed in the time chart of Fig. 27(2).

First, from t1 to t13 in FIG. 27(2), as shown in FIG. 52(1), the effects from the start of fluctuation to the SP reach effect are executed in the same way as from t1 to t13 in FIG. 27(1) (FIG. 48(1) to FIG. 51(1)).

Next, when a cut-in preview performance is to be executed, at t14 in FIG. 27(2), as shown in FIG. 52(2), a cut-in preview performance, etc. is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 38(5) while executing the SP reach performance. In FIG. 52(2), a red cut-in preview performance, etc. is executed.

After FIG. 52 (1) or (2), at t15 in FIG. 27 (2), the SPSP reach effect progresses as shown in FIG. 48 (3). Specifically, an SPSP reach background dedicated to the SPSP reach effect (for example, a background during an SPSP battle in which the protagonist character fights an enemy boss character) is displayed, and an SPSP development emphasis effect is executed to emphasize that the SPSP reach effect has progressed. The SPSP development emphasis effect is an effect in which a unique light-emitting effect that causes the SPSP reach background to be illuminated on a large scale (for example, the entire display screen is illuminated) is displayed overall, and a unique sound effect "Gyoon" (volume 9/10) is output (see FIG. 63, etc.). In addition, a synchronized swing emphasis effect is executed (continues) for the decorative pattern (reach eye) in the form of a number displayed in a reduced size at the top of the screen. Note that the SP reach effect and/or the SPSP reach effect may be configured not to display decorative patterns.

Next, in the case of a miss, at t16 in FIG. 27(2), as shown in FIG. 52(2), an image of the SPSP battle defeat in which the SPSP battle is lost is displayed in the SPSP reach background, and an SPSP defeat emphasis effect is executed on the SPSP reach background, etc. The SPSP defeat emphasis effect is an effect that emphasizes that the result of the SPSP reach is a miss (SPSP battle defeat), and for example, a unique light-emitting effect that partially lights up the SPSP reach background on a small scale (for example, the central area of the display screen lights up) is displayed, and a unique sound effect "Zuzoon" (volume 7/10) is output (see FIG. 63, etc.). This unique sound effect also serves as the sound effect of the temporary stop emphasis effect of the middle decorative pattern DI3 that is temporarily stopped with the pattern that is a miss. Also, as shown in FIG. 52(4), in this temporary stop emphasis effect, a small-scale unique light-emitting effect is displayed on the middle decorative pattern DI3. Note that, although a swing emphasis effect is not executed on the temporarily stopped middle decorative pattern DI3, it may be executed. Here, when the intermediate decorative pattern DI3 temporarily stops on a pattern that is a losing combination, the light emitting effect of the temporary stop highlighting effect is not displayed for the intermediate decorative pattern DI3, so that the player can be left with a sense of expectation that the intermediate decorative pattern DI3 will change again and then temporarily stop on a pattern that is a winning combination, resulting in a revival winning combination (not shown). For this reason, it is desirable to configure the revival winning combination to be executable with a low probability (for example, 1.5% of the time when a jackpot is hit).

Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (5), the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped is returned from the number form to the number character form (see FIG. 23) and enlarged, and a swing emphasis effect is executed in synchronization (synchronization) with the decorative patterns on the left, right, and center.

Next, at t17 in FIG. 27(2), as shown in FIG. 52(6), the decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 on the left, right, and center that were temporarily stopped are reduced to their original size and displayed as fixed stops, and a miss is announced.

On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot, at t16 in FIG. 27(2), as shown in FIG. 52(7), an image of an SPSP battle victory in which the SPSP battle has been won is displayed in the SPSP reach background, and an SPSP victory emphasis effect is executed on the SPSP reach background, etc. The SPSP victory emphasis effect is an effect that emphasizes that the result of the SPSP reach is a jackpot (SPSP battle victory), and is, for example, an effect that displays a unique lighting effect that causes the entire SPSP reach background to light up on a large scale (for example, the entire display screen lights up) and outputs a unique sound effect "Ta-da-da-daaaaaah" (sound 9/10) (see FIG. 63, etc.).

Also, at t16 in FIG. 27(2), as shown in FIG. 52(7), similar to FIG. 51(5), the middle decorative pattern DI3 temporarily stops at a pattern that is a jackpot, and a special temporary stop highlighting effect is executed for the middle decorative pattern DI3. In this special temporary stop highlighting effect (temporary stop highlighting effect when a doublet is formed), a different effect is executed from the normal temporary stop highlighting effect (FIG. 32), and for example, a special light-emitting effect is displayed. In addition, no swing highlighting effect is executed for the temporarily stopped middle decorative pattern DI3. Note that when the middle decorative pattern DI3 temporarily stops at a pattern that is a jackpot, the temporary stop highlighting effect may not be executed, and the above-mentioned special sound effect "Ta-da-da-da-da" may not be output. In addition, at least a part (for example, light-emitting effect) of the above-mentioned SPSP victory highlighting effect and the SP victory highlighting effect may be the same or different.

Next, as shown in Fig. 52 (8), similar to Fig. 51 (6), the decorative symbols during the temporary stop are returned from the number form to the number character form (see Fig. 23) and enlarged, and a doublet occurrence highlighting effect is executed (see Figs. 44, 45, 61, etc.). Note that the doublet occurrence highlighting effect may be different depending on the scene of the effect (for example, the scene of Fig. 52 (8) and the scene of Fig. 51 (6)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 52(9), for the decorative patterns on the left, right, and center, a pattern confirmation suggestion highlighting effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 51(7) (see FIG. 46, FIG. 47, FIG. 61, etc.). Note that the pattern confirmation suggestion highlighting effect may be different depending on the scene of the effect (for example, the scene of FIG. 52(9) and the scene of FIG. 51(7)).

Next, at t17 in FIG. 27(2), as shown in FIG. 52(10), the decorative symbols DI1 to DI3 that were temporarily stopped on the left, right, and center are reduced to their original size and displayed as definitely stopped, and a jackpot is announced.

As explained above, in this embodiment, in the notification performance (variable performance), various performances with various presentation meanings (cut-in advance notice performance, pseudo consecutive performance, reach performance, SP reach performance, chance eye performance, specific result advance notice performance, etc.) are executed, and each of the various performances is executed during the various performances (see Figures 28 to 52, etc.). By executing the emphasis performances in this manner, according to this embodiment, it is possible to suggest (hint), notify, or emphasize the presentation meaning of each of the various performances mentioned above, and the presentation effect of the notification performance can be synergistically enhanced.

Second Embodiment
The second embodiment will be described below with reference to Figures 53 to 55. The second embodiment is an embodiment in which a re-lottery presentation is executed in the gaming machine 1 according to each embodiment.

Here, the re-lottery effect is an effect in which, in the notification effect, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a combination (double number) that indicates a jackpot, a jackpot is notified, and then the temporarily stopped decorative symbols are changed again with a double number, and then the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped again with a combination (double number) that indicates a jackpot, and the type of jackpot is made to look as if it has changed depending on the decorative symbols that have been temporarily stopped again (that is, it is an effect that makes it look as if the type of jackpot has changed by lottery). As already explained, there are normal jackpots, which are set to a normal game state after a jackpot game, and time-saving jackpots, which are set to a time-saving game state after a jackpot game and can be won via a small jackpot, and in the notification effect, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped with a pattern 3 or 7, which suggests that a time-saving jackpot has been won, and the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped with a pattern other than 3 and 7, which suggests that a normal jackpot has been won.

Figures 53 and 54 are specific diagrams for explaining the re-draw performance when a normal jackpot is suggested and then changes to a time-limited jackpot (when the jackpot is upgraded) and when it does not change (when the jackpot is not upgraded). Below, using Figures 53 and 54, we will explain the re-draw performance when a normal jackpot is suggested and then changes to a time-limited jackpot (when the jackpot is upgraded) and when it does not change (when the jackpot is not upgraded).

First, after the SP battle is won in the SP reach effect and the decorative symbols temporarily stop with a double number (see FIG. 51 (5)) (or after the SPSP battle is won in the SPSP reach effect and the decorative symbols temporarily stop with a double number (see FIG. 52 (7))), as shown in FIG. 53 (1), the effect is executed in the same way as in FIG. 51 (6) and FIG. 52 (8), and a double number formation highlighting effect is executed for the decorative symbols on the left, right, and center.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (2), the same effect as in FIG. 51 (7) and FIG. 52 (9) is executed, and a pattern confirmation suggestion effect is executed, indicating that the decorative patterns on the left, right, and center are confirmed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 53 (3), a re-draw effect is executed. Specifically, a re-draw effect is executed in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size and re-varied while a re-draw background dedicated to the re-draw effect (for example, a background of a thundercloud with lightning flashing) is displayed, and a re-draw emphasis effect is executed. The re-draw emphasis effect is an effect that emphasizes the re-draw effect (re-draw background), and includes a unique action (e.g., action), a light-emitting effect (e.g., the re-draw background lights up on a large scale overall, and the sound effect "goong" (volume 5/10) (see FIG. 65, etc.). The action of displaying the decorative pattern in a reduced size and re-changing it may be considered as part of the re-draw emphasis effect. Also, when re-changing, the decorative pattern may be changed from a number character form to a number form (see FIG. 23). Also, the decorative pattern may be hidden during re-changing, or the display of the re-changing itself may not be executed. Also, a movable role effect may be executed in which the movable role 73 (see FIG. 1) is moved to the front of the screen 70 during re-changing, so that part or all of the decorative pattern during re-changing is hidden (difficult to see or cannot be seen).

Next, if the game does not progress to a time-limited jackpot, as shown in FIG. 53 (4), the decorative symbols that were reduced in size and changed again are enlarged (temporarily stopped) to the full screen as a matching symbol indicating a normal jackpot, and a promotion failure double digit highlighting effect is executed. The promotion failure double digit highlighting effect is an effect that emphasizes the matching symbol indicating a normal jackpot (promotion failure), and includes a unique character action (e.g., a winning action in which the character cheers), a light-emitting effect (e.g., the decorative symbols on the left, right, and center light up on a small scale), and a sound effect "thud" (volume 6/10) (see FIG. 65, etc.). Note that a re-draw background may also be displayed during this promotion failure effect. In addition, when enlarging (temporarily stopped) the matching symbol indicating a normal jackpot, the enlargement may extend beyond the screen 70 (be partially cut off).

Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (5), a pattern confirmation suggestion emphasis effect is executed to indicate that the decorative patterns on the left, right, and center during the provisional stop will be confirmed (see FIG. 46, FIG. 47, FIG. 61, etc.). Here, the light emitting effect of the pattern confirmation suggestion emphasis effect of the re-draw effect differs from the sparkling light emitting of FIG. 46, in which the reflective part moves from bottom to top, in that the reflective part moves from the bottom right to the top right. The sound effects are also different. Note that at least a part of the pattern confirmation suggestion emphasis effect (e.g. the light emitting effect) may be made different or larger (or smaller) in scale depending on the scene of the effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (6), the decorative symbols DI1 to DI3 on the left, right, and center that were temporarily stopped are reduced to their original size and displayed as definitely stopped, similar to the effects in FIG. 51 (8) and so on, and finally, a normal jackpot is announced.

On the other hand, when the player is promoted to a time-saving jackpot, the presentation changes from FIG. 53(3) to FIG. 54(1), and as shown in FIG. 54(1), the decorative symbols that were displayed in a reduced size and then changed again are enlarged (temporarily stopped) to the entire screen with the matching symbols indicating a time-saving jackpot, and a promotion success double digit highlight presentation is executed. The promotion success double digit highlight presentation is a presentation that emphasizes the matching symbols indicating a time-saving jackpot (promotion success), and includes a unique character action (for example, a winning action in which the character cheers), a light-emitting effect (for example, the decorative symbols on the left, right, and center light up on a large scale), and a sound effect "boom boom boom" (volume 9/10) (see FIG. 65, etc.). Note that a re-draw background may also be displayed during this promotion success presentation. In addition, when enlarging (temporarily stopped) the matching symbols indicating a time-saving jackpot, the display may be enlarged until they go beyond the screen 70 (partially cut off).

Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (2), the same effect as in FIG. 53 (2) is performed, and the re-selection effect highlighting the confirmed symbol is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (3), the same presentation as in FIG. 51 (6) is performed, and the decorative symbols DI1 to DI3 on the left, right, and center that were temporarily stopped are displayed as fixed stops, and finally, a time-saving jackpot is announced.

Figure 55 is a specific diagram for explaining a re-draw effect in which a time-saving jackpot is suggested once and then a re-draw effect is executed to suggest a time-saving jackpot again. Below, using Figure 55, we will explain a re-draw effect in which a time-saving jackpot is suggested once and then a re-draw effect is executed to suggest a time-saving jackpot again.

First, after the SP battle is won in the SP reach performance and the decorative symbols temporarily stop with a double number (see FIG. 51 (5)) (or after the SPSP battle is won in the SPSP reach performance and the decorative symbols temporarily stop with a double number (see FIG. 52 (7))), as shown in FIG. 55 (1), a performance similar to FIG. 53 (1) is executed, and the decorative symbols on the left, right, and center are displayed temporarily stopped with matching patterns that normally indicate a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (2), a presentation similar to that shown in FIG. 53 (2) is executed, and a pattern confirmation suggestion highlighting presentation is executed, indicating that the decorative patterns on the left, right, and center are confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55(3), a similar effect to that shown in FIG. 53(3) is executed, and a re-lottery effect is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (4), the same effect as in FIG. 54 (1) is executed, and the decorative symbols that were displayed in a reduced size and changed again are enlarged (temporarily stopped) to fill the entire screen as matching symbols indicating a time-saving jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (5), the same effect as in FIG. 54 (2) is performed, and the re-draw effect's symbol confirmation suggestion highlight effect is executed. Here, since this symbol confirmation suggestion highlight effect does not indicate successful promotion, it does not indicate successful promotion, but suggests a time-saving jackpot has been confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (6), the same presentation as in FIG. 54 (3) is performed, and the decorative symbols DI1 to DI3 on the left, right, and center that were temporarily stopped are displayed as fixed stops, and finally, a time-saving jackpot is announced.

As described above, in this embodiment, the effect of the re-draw performance can be effectively enhanced by performing various emphasis effects in the re-draw performance in the notification performance. For example, the pattern confirmation suggestion emphasis effect (see FIG. 53 (3)) before the re-draw performance suggests that at least a jackpot has been obtained, the pattern confirmation suggestion emphasis effect (see FIG. 54 (2)) of successful promotion after the re-draw performance suggests that a time-saving jackpot has been obtained, while the pattern confirmation suggestion emphasis effect (see FIG. 53 (5)) of failed promotion after the re-draw performance suggests that a normal jackpot has been obtained. Note that, when the time-saving jackpot pattern is temporarily stopped as in FIG. 55 (1), the re-draw performance may not be performed. In addition, although an example of performing a re-draw performance in the notification performance of the performance patterns of "SP hit" and "SPSP hit" (see FIG. 12, etc.) has been described above, a re-draw performance may also be performed in the notification performance of the performance pattern of "reach hit".

Third Embodiment
Hereinafter, the third embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 56. The third embodiment is an embodiment in which the special symbol 400 is displayed during the execution of the notification effect in the gaming machine 1 according to each embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 56, the special symbol 400 is displayed small in a specified position on the screen 70 (the lower right position in FIG. 57), and includes left and right diamond-shaped images (diamond images), left and right number reservation icons displayed above the left and right diamond images, respectively, and left and right center number patterns (number pattern strings) displayed below the left and right diamond images. Note that for ease of explanation, FIG. 56 shows an enlarged view of the special symbol 400.

The left diamond image is displayed in white during the execution of the notification effect for notifying the result of the first special symbol lottery, and is displayed in gray during other periods. The right diamond image is displayed in white during the execution of the notification effect for notifying the result of the second special symbol lottery, and is displayed in gray during other periods. In other words, the left and right diamond images are images that notify which notification effect is being executed, the notification effect for the first symbol lottery or the notification effect for the second symbol lottery.
The left number reserved icon is an image showing the reserved number of the first special pattern lottery in numbers, and the right number reserved icon is an image showing the reserved number of the second special pattern lottery in numbers. The left and right number reserved icons are designs to suggest (report) the reserved number of the special pattern lottery, just like the reserved icon RI, but unlike the reserved icon RI, they do not perform effects that suggest the reliability of the big win or are involved in various effects, and are designs that clearly suggest (report) the reserved number of the special pattern lottery. In other words, the reserved icon RI places importance on the performance effect, while the left and right number reserved icons place importance on clearly suggesting (reporting) the reserved number of the special pattern lottery.

The number patterns in the middle left and right, like the decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 in the middle left and right, are patterns that suggest (inform) the results of the special pattern lottery by changing and then stopping to display, but unlike the decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 in the middle left and right, they do not perform or are involved in various performances, but are patterns that clearly suggest (inform) the results of the special pattern lottery. In other words, while the decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 in the middle left and right place emphasis on performance effects, the number patterns in the middle left and right place emphasis on clearly suggesting (informing) the results of the special pattern lottery.

The special symbol 400 will be specifically described below with reference to FIG.
As shown in Figure 56 (1), when the left, right, and center decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 are displayed as fixed and stopped before the start of the notification performance, the special pattern 400 is displayed with the left and right diamond images displayed in gray, and the left and right center number patterns are displayed as stopped with the same numbers as the left and right decorative patterns displayed as fixed and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (2), while the notification effect is being performed (the decorative patterns in the left, right, and center are changing), the special pattern 400 is displayed with one of the left and right diamond images displayed in white, and the number patterns in the left and center are displayed changing downward. Here, the number patterns in the left and center change only downward in a cyclical manner in the order of pattern 1 → pattern 2 → pattern 3 → pattern 4 → pattern 5 → pattern 6 → pattern 7 → pattern 8 → pattern 9 → pattern 1, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (3), when the notification effect ends and the left, right, and center decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 are displayed as fixed stops, the special pattern 400 displays the left and right diamond images in gray, and the left and right center number patterns are displayed as the same numbers as the left and right decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 that are displayed as fixed stops.

Here, the left, right and center decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 which emphasize the presentation effect have their fluctuation speeds changed, but the left and right center number patterns of the special pattern 400 are displayed variably at a fixed constant speed faster than the fluctuation speeds of the left, right and center decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 (the fluctuation speeds do not change).
Furthermore, unlike the decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 on the left, right and center of the special pattern 400 which emphasize presentation effects, the number patterns on the left, right and center do not change appearance (including color change), are not enlarged or reduced in size, and do not emit light.
Furthermore, unlike the reserve icon RI which emphasizes dramatic effect, the number reserve icons on the left and right of the special pattern 400 do not change appearance (including color change) or emit light, etc.
In addition, the number symbols in the center of the left and right of the special symbol 400 are in reach status in the same manner as the decorative symbols DI1 to DI3 in the center of the left and right that emphasize the performance effect, but the reach-inducing performance is not executed. Note that the number symbols in the center of the left and right of the special symbol 400 may not be in reach status and may change even when the decorative symbols in the center of the left and right are in reach status.
Furthermore, unlike decorative patterns, the special pattern 400 is displayed in the same size at a specific position (fixed position) on the screen 70 during at least one notification performance period (or at all times).
In addition, the number patterns of the special patterns 400 are of nine types, from pattern 1 to pattern 9, which is fewer types than the decorative patterns, which include consecutive patterns that are different from normal patterns.
Moreover, unlike the decorative patterns, the number patterns of the special pattern 400 move (change) only in a certain direction (downward, etc.).
Furthermore, unlike decorative patterns, the special pattern 400 is not partially (or entirely) hidden by the movable reel 73 when the movable reel performance is executed.
In addition, the special symbol 400 is not displayed during a jackpot game (during a jackpot game presentation).
In addition, unlike decorative patterns, the special pattern 400 does not execute various light-emitting effects. Furthermore, the special pattern 400 is not affected by various effect images (decorative patterns, etc.) or various light-emitting effects (light-emitting effects such as temporary stop emphasis effects and SP development emphasis effects) that do not overlap in front of it.
In addition, unlike the decorative patterns, the number patterns of the special patterns 400 are not displayed temporarily as one aspect of the variable display, and are displayed variably even when, for example, the decorative patterns are in a temporarily stopped state and a pattern confirmation suggestion highlighting performance is being performed. Note that the number patterns of the special patterns 400 may also be displayed temporarily as in the case of the decorative patterns.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 on the left, right, and center, which emphasize the presentation effect, are displayed, and the special pattern 400 is displayed to clearly indicate (inform) the result of the special pattern lottery. Furthermore, the special pattern 400 does not execute light-emitting presentation (light-emitting effect), and is not affected by light-emitting presentation, etc.

[Comparison table of emphasis effects]
57 to 66 are comparison tables of various highlighting effects described in each embodiment, etc. As shown in Fig. 57 to 66, the effects of the notification effects can be synergistically enhanced by the features of the various highlighting effects described in each embodiment, etc.

For example, the reach establishment emphasis effect (see Figure 59) may include a horizontal line-shaped light-emitting effect with a narrow light-emitting area connecting the left and right decorative patterns, compared to the SP development emphasis effect (see Figure 63) and SPSP development emphasis effect (see Figure 63) which may be executed subsequently and in which the entire background screen can be illuminated.
Also, for example, the reach establishment emphasis presentation (Figure 40 (1) etc.) may include a horizontal line-shaped light-emitting effect in which the width of the light-emitting area connecting the left and right decorative patterns is narrower than the chance eye light-emitting effect (Figure 36) in which the left, right and center decorative patterns that form the chance eye and their surroundings can be illuminated.
In addition, for example, the reach establishment emphasis effect includes the above-mentioned line-shaped light-emitting effect, and has a different light-emitting area and light-emitting range from the pattern confirmation suggestion emphasis effect (Figures 61, 46, etc.) in which the light-emitting effect moves, for example, from bottom to top, only on the surface of each decorative pattern.
Also, for example, the reach establishment highlighting effect includes the line-shaped illumination described above, and has a different illumination area and range from the pattern confirmation suggestion highlighting effect (see Figures 61 and 47) in which the illumination effect spreads from the central decorative pattern to the entire screen.
In addition, for example, the change start emphasis effect (see Figures 57 and 31) and the temporary stop emphasis effect (see Figures 57 and 32) subtly (weakly) emphasize the decorative pattern and its surroundings, and are smaller in scale and have a narrower light-emitting range than the flashy emphasis effects that aim for a greater effect (chance eye emphasis effect, SP development emphasis effect, SPSP development emphasis effect, double number establishment emphasis effect, etc.).
Also, for example, in the SP victory highlighting effect (see FIG. 63), the entire screen of the SP reach background is illuminated strongly, whereas in the SP defeat highlighting effect (see FIG. 63), the entire screen of the SP reach background is illuminated weakly. Note that the illumination range of the SP defeat highlighting effect may be narrower than that of the SP victory highlighting effect. The same applies to the relationship between the SP SP victory illumination and the SP SP defeat illumination.

Also, as shown in Figs. 57 to 66, the "proportion (maximum value) of the highlighted area to the entire decorative pattern," the "proportion (maximum value) of the highlighted area to the entire decorative pattern," and the "proportion (maximum value) of the highlighted area to the entire screen" (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "three proportions") vary depending on each highlighting effect. Here, in the above three proportions, the "highlighted area" may be considered, for example, as an area where character movements and light emission effects are performed, or as an area where light emission effects are performed. Note that, in the descriptions of these proportions (description of percentages) in Figs. 57 to 66, relatively desirable proportions (%) are underlined, but this is not limiting.
For example, the proportion of the shaking emphasis effect may be smaller than that of the temporary stop emphasis effect, the fluctuation start emphasis effect, the reach establishment emphasis effect, the double number establishment emphasis effect, etc.
Also, for example, the ratio of three for reach miss emphasis effects may be smaller than that for reach success emphasis effects and repeat number success emphasis effects.
Also, for example, the proportion of temporary stop emphasis effects and fluctuation start emphasis effects may be smaller than the proportion of reach establishment emphasis effects and doublet establishment emphasis effects.
Here, the chance eye emphasis effect is an emphasis effect that is executed when the variation stops (more precisely, before the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped), so it can be considered as a kind of temporary stop emphasis effect. Also, the variation start notice emphasis effect, which will be described later, is an emphasis effect that is executed when the variation starts, so it can be considered as a kind of variation start emphasis effect. In that case, the chance eye emphasis effect and the variation stop notice emphasis effect may have a larger ratio of three than the normal temporary stop emphasis effect and variation start emphasis effect.

Note that the various features of the emphasis effects described in the comparison tables of Figures 57 to 66 and other figures are examples and are not limited to these. For example, emphasis effects that are expected to have a high effect (e.g., reach establishment emphasis effects, SP development emphasis effects, etc.) may be characterized by strong light emission, wide range light emission, loud sound effects, and flashy actions. Also, emphasis effects that are not expected to have a high effect (e.g., fluctuation start emphasis effects, temporary stop emphasis effects, etc.) may be characterized by weak light emission, narrow range light emission, low sound effects (no sound effects), and modest actions (no action). Also, the aspect of each emphasis effect may be different depending on the game state, the presentation stage (presentation mode), and the presentation scene (for example, before and after a specific presentation (reach establishment presentation, SP reach development presentation, etc.)).

Fourth Embodiment
The fourth embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. 67 to FIG. 69. In the fourth embodiment, in the gaming machine 1 according to each embodiment, when the effect button 16 is operated in a predetermined manner during the operation effective period (for example, 5 seconds) during which the operation of the effect button 16 is accepted, an operation response effect is executed that enables a predetermined effect (for example, a predetermined notice effect or a movable role effect, etc.). In addition, in order to improve the effect of the effect by executing the operation response effect, an operation prompting effect is executed to make the player perform a predetermined operation of the effect button 16 during the operation effective period. The operation prompting effect includes display of an operation prompting image 351 (specifically, an image including a button image imitating the effect button 16, a gauge image dynamically indicating the remaining amount of the operation effective period, and a text image (such as "Press!"). Hereinafter, the operation prompting image including the gauge image, etc. may be referred to as a button image. The operation prompting effect may include a voice output (such as "Press!"). In addition, in this embodiment, there is a single press operation response effect, which executes an operation response effect in response to the effect button 16 being pressed once during the valid operation period, a rapid press operation response effect, which executes an operation response effect in response to the effect button 16 being pressed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 times) during the valid operation period, and a long press operation response effect, which executes an operation response effect in response to the effect button 16 being pressed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 2 seconds) during the valid operation period.

An example of a single-push operation response effect will be described with reference to FIG. 67. First, as shown in FIG. 67 (1), a button image emphasis effect is executed to emphasize the button image 351 (see FIG. 65, etc.). Specifically, at a position where the button image 351 is displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 16, a light-emitting effect 350 is displayed for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) to emphasize the button image 351 in advance and to suggest that the button image 351 will be displayed. Note that a unique sound effect may be output as part of the button image emphasis effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(2), the button image 351 is displayed. Here, the button image 351 starts to be displayed just before the display of the light-emitting effect 350 ends (for example, 0.1 seconds before). That is, the button image 351 and the light-emitting effect 350 are displayed simultaneously for a moment. Here, the light-emitting effect 350 is semi-transparent (for example, 50% transparency) and is larger than the button image 351, so the button image 351 can be seen through the light-emitting effect 350 behind it. Note that the displayed button image 351 may display another light-emitting effect (a light-emitting effect different from the light-emitting effect 350) that emphasizes the button image 351. Also, as shown in FIG. 67(2), together with the display of the button image 351 (linked to the display of the button image 351), a button highlight effect that emphasizes the effect button 16 is executed (see FIG. 65, etc.). The button highlight effect is an emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect button 16, and is an emphasis effect that causes the effect button 16 to emit light, vibrate, or protrude (the button part protrudes by, for example, 5 cm). In FIG. 67 (2), the effect button 16 is illuminated and vibrated. Note that the vibration of the effect button 16 is accompanied by a physical vibration sound, and this vibration sound can also be considered as an effect button emphasis effect. In addition, the effect button emphasis effect may include a unique sound effect (a sound effect output from a speaker).

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (3), when the effect button 16 is pressed (pressed once) during the operation valid period, when the button image 351 disappears (is hidden) in response to this, a button image highlighting effect that highlights the button image 351 is executed (see FIG. 65, etc.), and the effect button highlighting effect ends. Also, the operation valid period ends (even before it expires). Specifically, at the position where the button image 351 was displayed, a light emitting effect 352 that highlights the button image 351 (highlights the disappearance of the button image 351) is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.7 seconds). Here, the button image 351 is hidden immediately (for example, 0.2 seconds later) after the display of the light emitting effect 352 begins. In other words, the button image 351 and the light emitting effect 352 are displayed simultaneously for an instant. Here, the light emitting effect 352 is semi-transparent (for example, 50% transparency) and is larger than the button image 351, so that the button image 351 can be seen through the light emitting effect 352 behind it. Note that a unique sound effect may be output as part of the button image highlighting effect. In addition, by continuing the button highlighting effect even after the button image 351 disappears, it may be possible to indicate a high probability of a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (4), an operation response effect (such as a preview effect) is executed in response to the operation of the effect button 16. Note that the gauge image and text image ("Press!") shown in FIG. 67 (2) can be considered as part of a button image emphasis effect that emphasizes the operation prompting image (i.e., the button image), rather than as an operation prompting image. The effect button emphasis effect may be started at the same time as the light emission effect 350 is displayed, or may be started earlier than that.

Next, an example of a rapid-fire operation response effect will be described with reference to FIG. 68. First, as shown in FIG. 68(1), a button image highlighting effect is executed to highlight the button image 351, similar to FIG. 67(1) (see FIG. 65, etc.). Note that a unique sound effect may be output as part of the button image highlighting effect.

Next, in the case of the type 1 repeated tap operation response performance, as shown in FIG. 68 (2-1), a performance similar to that in FIG. 67 (2) is performed, and the button image 351 is displayed. However, in FIG. 68 (2-1), the text image "Repeated tap!" is displayed. Note that the displayed button image 351 may display another light-emitting effect (a light-emitting effect different from the light-emitting effect 350) that emphasizes the button image 351. Also, as shown in FIG. 68 (2-1), similar to FIG. 67 (2), together with the display of the button image 351 (linked to the display of the button image 351), a button highlight performance that emphasizes the performance button 16 is executed (see FIG. 65, etc.). Note that the vibration of the performance button 16 is accompanied by a physical vibration sound, and this vibration sound can also be considered as a button highlight performance. Also, a sound effect specific to the button highlight performance (a sound effect output from a speaker) may be included in the button highlight performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (3-1), when the effect button 16 is repeatedly tapped (or pressed and held) during the operation valid period, a button image highlighting effect that highlights the button image 351 is executed accordingly (see FIG. 65, etc.). Specifically, during the period during which the effect button 16 is repeatedly tapped (or pressed and held), a semi-transparent light-emitting effect 353 (light-emitting effect 353 larger than the button image 351) that highlights the button image 351 is displayed at the position where the button image 351 was displayed, and a button image repeatedly tapping action display that periodically repeats up and down movements as if the button image 351 was tapped repeatedly is performed. In addition, together with this button image repeatedly tapping action display, the button image may flash as part of the button image highlighting effect. In addition, a unique sound effect may be output as part of the button image highlighting effect. In addition, the button image repeatedly tapping action display can be considered as part of the button image highlighting effect. In addition, as shown in FIG. 68 (3-1), the effect button highlighting effect that highlights the effect button 16 continues in a different highlighting mode (for example, in a different light-emitting color) or in the same highlighting mode.

On the other hand, in the case of the type 2 rapid-fire operation response performance, the button image 351 is displayed as in FIG. 68 (2-1), and then the button image rapid-fire action display is performed as in FIG. 68 (2-2). Note that the button image 351 on which the rapid-fire button image display is performed may display another light-emitting effect (light-emitting effect different from light-emitting effect 350) that emphasizes the button image 351. Also, as shown in FIG. 68 (2-2), similar to FIG. 67 (2), together with the display of the button image 351 (linked to the display of the button image 351), a button highlight performance that emphasizes the performance button 16 is executed (see FIG. 65, etc.). Note that the vibration of the performance button 16 is accompanied by a physical vibration sound, and this vibration sound can also be considered as a button highlight performance. Also, the button highlight performance may include a unique sound effect (sound effect output from a speaker).

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (3-2), when the effect button 16 is repeatedly tapped (or pressed and held) during the effective operation period, a button image highlighting effect that highlights the button image 351 is executed accordingly (see FIG. 65, etc.). Specifically, during the period during which the effect button 16 is repeatedly tapped (or pressed and held), a semi-transparent light-emitting effect 353 that highlights the button image 351 is displayed at the position where the button image 351 was displayed, and the button image repeated tapping action display continues. In addition, together with this button image repeated tapping action display, the button image may flash as part of the button image highlighting effect. Also, a unique sound effect may be output as part of the button image highlighting effect. Also, as shown in FIG. 68 (3-2), the effect button highlighting effect that highlights the effect button 16 continues in a different highlighting mode (for example, in a different light-emitting color) or in the same highlighting mode.

After FIG. 68 (3-1) or (3-2), as shown in FIG. 68 (4), when the conditions for executing the operation response effect (for example, 10 consecutive taps or a long press for 3 seconds) are met, the button image 351, the button image emphasis effect, and the button emphasis effect are terminated, and the operation response effect (such as a preview effect) is executed. At that time, the operation valid period ends (even if it has not yet expired). Note that the gauge image and text image ("Continuous tap!") shown in FIG. 68 can be considered not as an operation prompting image, but as part of the button image emphasis effect that emphasizes the operation prompting image (i.e., the button image). Also, the button image repeated tapping action display can be considered as part of the button image emphasis effect.

Next, an example of a long press operation response performance will be described with reference to FIG. 69. First, as shown in FIG. 69(1), a button image highlighting performance is executed to highlight the button image 351, similar to FIG. 67(1) (see FIG. 65, etc.). Note that a unique sound effect may be output as part of the button image highlighting performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(2), the same effect as in FIG. 67(2) is performed, and the button image 351 is displayed. However, in FIG. 69(2), the text image "Long press!" is displayed. Note that the displayed button image 351 may display another light-emitting effect (a light-emitting effect different from the light-emitting effect 350) that emphasizes the button image 351. Also, as shown in FIG. 69(2), similar to FIG. 67(2), together with the display of the button image 351 (linked to the display of the button image 351), a button highlight effect that emphasizes the button 16 is executed (see FIG. 65, etc.). Note that the vibration of the button 16 is accompanied by a physical vibration sound, and this vibration sound can also be considered as a button highlight effect. Also, a sound effect specific to the button highlight effect (a sound effect output from a speaker) may be included in the button highlight effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (3), when the effect button 16 is pressed and held for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) during the operation valid period, a button image highlighting effect that highlights the button image 351 is executed accordingly (see FIG. 65, etc.). Also, the operation valid period ends (even before it expires). Specifically, during the period during which the effect button 16 is pressed and held, a semi-transparent light-emitting effect 353 (light-emitting effect 353 larger than the button image 351) that highlights the button image 351 is displayed at the position where the button image 351 is displayed, and the button image 351 is pressed as if it was pressed and held. In addition, together with this button image long press operation display, the button image may flash as part of the button image highlighting effect. Also, a unique sound effect may be output as part of the button image highlighting effect. Also, the button image long press operation display can be considered as part of the button image highlighting effect. Also, as shown in FIG. 69 (3), the effect button highlighting effect that highlights the effect button 16 continues in a different highlighting mode (e.g., in a different light-emitting color) or in the same highlighting mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (4), in response to the execution conditions of the operation response performance (e.g., a long press for 3 seconds) being met, the button image 351, the button image emphasis performance, and the button emphasis performance are terminated, and the operation response performance (such as a preview performance) is executed. Note that the gauge image and text image ("Long press!") shown in FIG. 69 can also be considered as part of the button image emphasis performance that emphasizes the operation prompting image (i.e., the button image), rather than as an operation prompting image. Also, in the single press operation response performance, rapid-fire operation response performance, and long press operation response performance shown in FIG. 68 to FIG. 69, the aspects of the corresponding emphasis performances (e.g., light emission effect 350, etc.) may be different from each other.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the entertainment value of the presentation can be significantly improved by implementing various highlighting effects that emphasize the operation prompting image (button image).

Fifth Embodiment
The fifth embodiment will be described below with reference to Figures 70 to 77. In the fifth embodiment, in the gaming machine 1 according to each embodiment, a volume gauge and a light quantity gauge are displayed on the main image display unit 70, and control is performed to prevent a decrease in visibility of these gauges.
The volume gauge is a gauge that indicates the volume (maximum volume) output from the speaker 9. The light intensity gauge is a gauge that indicates the amount of light (maximum amount of light) output from the movable role object 73, the performance button 16, the board lamp, the frame lamp, etc. In this embodiment, the light intensity of the main image display unit 70 and the sub-image display unit 71 is not adjusted, but the light intensity of the main image display unit 70 and the sub-image display unit 71 may be adjusted in the same way as (at the same time as) the board lamp, etc.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an example of a volume gauge 360 and a light amount gauge 361 displayed on the main image display section 70. As shown in FIG.
The volume gauge 360 and the light quantity gauge 361 are both displayed simultaneously when any key of the cross key 18 (or the back key 170) is pressed, and both are hidden when a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the last operation of the cross key 18. Note that the volume gauge 360 may be displayed/hidden in conjunction with the operation of the up and down keys of the cross key 18, and the light quantity gauge 361 may be displayed/hidden in conjunction with the operation of the left and right keys of the cross key 18. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which only the volume gauge 360 is displayed when any key of the back key 170 is pressed.

As shown in Fig. 70, the volume gauge 360 includes a scale display and a character display indicating the current volume (maximum volume), and an operation method display suggesting that the volume can be changed with the up and down keys of the cross key 18. In Fig. 70, 5 scales are displayed as the scale display, and "Volume 5" is displayed as the character display. The maximum value of the scale display and the character display of the volume gauge 360 is "7".
70, the light amount gauge 361 includes a scale display showing the current light amount (maximum light amount), a character display showing the light amount, and an operation method display suggesting that the light amount can be changed by using the left and right keys of the cross key 18. In FIG. 70, four scales are displayed as the scale display, and "light amount 4" is displayed as the character display. The maximum value of the scale display and character display of the light amount gauge 361 is "7". Note that the maximum values of the scale display and character display of the volume gauge 360 and the light amount gauge 361 may be different.

71 is a diagram showing an example of the display of the volume gauge 360 and the light gauge 361 when the cross key 18 is operated. As shown in FIG. 71(1), when the up key of the cross key 18 is pressed once, the scale display and the character display of the volume gauge 360 are increased by one, and the volume of the gaming machine 1 is increased by one level. As shown in FIG. 71(2), when the down key of the cross key 18 is pressed once, the scale display and the character display of the volume gauge 360 are decreased by one, and the volume of the gaming machine 1 is decreased by one level. As shown in FIG. 71(3), when the right key of the cross key 18 is pressed once, the scale display and the character display of the light gauge 361 are increased by one, and the light amount of the gaming machine 1 is increased by one level. As shown in FIG. 71(4), when the left key of the cross key 18 is pressed once, the scale display and the character display of the light gauge 361 are decreased by one, and the light amount of the gaming machine 1 is decreased by one level.

Figure 72 shows an example in which the display of the volume gauge 360 (and the maximum volume) changes when a store clerk or the like operates the rear key 170 on the rear of the game board. As shown in Figure 72 (1), when the rear key 170 key that increases the volume is pressed once, the scale display and text display of the volume gauge 360 increase by two, and the volume of the gaming machine 1 increases by two levels. As shown in Figure 72 (2), when the rear key 170 key that decreases the volume is pressed once, the scale display and text display of the volume gauge 360 decrease by two, and the volume of the gaming machine 1 decreases by two levels.

Figure 73 is a diagram for explaining an example of an operation for setting an upper limit on the maximum volume of the gaming machine 1 (speaker 9). First, a store clerk or the like at the gaming facility performs a prescribed operation (e.g., a password input operation, etc.) on the cross key 18 and the effect button 16, which causes a system menu (not shown) to be displayed for the store clerk or the like to operate. Then, when the store clerk or the like selects "Maximum volume limit setting" displayed on the system menu, a maximum volume limit setting screen as shown in Figure 73 (1) is displayed on the main image display section 70.

As shown in FIG. 73 (1), the maximum volume limit setting screen displays a volume scale 363 consisting of seven scales from 1 to 7, and a cursor 362 for designating one of the scales of the volume scale 363. The cursor 362 designates the upper limit of the maximum volume of the speaker 9, and the volume of the scale designated (positioned) by the cursor 362 is set as the upper limit of the maximum volume of the speaker 9 (i.e., the maximum volume that can be output). Note that the seven scales of the volume scale 363 correspond to the seven scales of the volume gauge 360 described using FIG. 70 etc.

Each time the left or down key of the cross key 18 is pressed once, the cursor 362 moves one scale to the left (the direction in which the upper limit of the maximum volume decreases), and each time the right or up key of the cross key 18 is pressed once, the cursor 362 moves one scale to the right (the direction in which the upper limit of the maximum volume increases). In the example of Fig. 73 (1), the cursor 362 is in a state where it designates the fifth scale of the volume scale 363, and the upper limit of the maximum volume of the speaker 9 is set to the fifth scale (i.e., the setting value of the upper limit of the maximum volume is set to 5). In this case, the maximum volume that can be adjusted by operating the cross key 18 or the back key 170 described with reference to Figs. 71 and 72 is limited to scales 1 to 5 (i.e., it cannot be set to scale 6 or higher).
In this way, by performing a predetermined operation on the maximum volume limit setting screen, the upper limit of the maximum volume of the gaming machine 1 (speaker 9) can be set, which makes it possible to adjust (limit) the upper limit of the volume in the gaming facility as a whole.

Figure 73 (2) is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the maximum volume limit setting value and the maximum volume. As shown in Figure 73 (2), for example, if the maximum volume limit setting value is 5, the maximum volume of the speaker 9 will be limited to 85 dB (decibels). Note that error sounds that notify of possible fraudulent activity (e.g., abnormal magnetic detection, abnormal shaking, abnormal winning, etc.) are output at a predetermined volume (e.g., the volume of scale 7) regardless of the maximum volume limit setting value.

Figure 74 is a diagram illustrating an example of control to prevent a decrease in visibility of the volume gauge 360 and the light gauge 361 displayed on the main image display unit 70.

First, as shown in Fig. 74(1), a volume gauge 360 and a light quantity gauge 361 are displayed. In Fig. 74(1), the left decorative symbol is temporarily stopped to perform a swing emphasis effect, and the center right decorative symbol is scrolling at high speed, and the volume gauge 360 and the light quantity gauge 361 are displayed at the position of the center right decorative symbol that is scrolling at high speed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 74(2), when a reach is achieved and a reach achievement emphasizing effect is executed, and the light emitting effect 310 is displayed at a position overlapping the volume gauge 360 and the light quantity gauge 361, the volume gauge 360 and the light quantity gauge 361 are controlled and moved to a position where they do not overlap the light emitting effect 310. Also, in Fig. 74(2), the volume gauge 360 and the light quantity gauge 361 are displayed in a reduced size due to limited space.

Figure 75 is an example of a flow chart of control for preventing a decrease in visibility of the volume gauge 360 and the light gauge 361 displayed on the main image display unit 70. This is explained below.

First, in step S300 of FIG. 75, the CPU 501 of the image/audio control unit 500 determines whether the volume gauge 360 and the light quantity gauge 361 are being displayed. If the determination is YES, the process proceeds to step S301, and if the determination is NO, the process returns to step S300.

In step S301, the CPU 501 determines whether or not a predetermined emphasis effect is to be executed. The predetermined emphasis effect is, for example, one of the emphasis effects described in Figures 57 to 66, and in the example of Figure 74, it is a reach-achi emphasis effect. Note that instead of a predetermined emphasis effect, it may be determined whether or not all emphasis effects are to be executed. If this determination is YES, processing proceeds to step S302, and if this determination is NO, processing returns to step S300.

In step S302, the CPU 501 determines whether the display of the predetermined emphasis effect determined to be executed in step S301 affects the volume gauge 360 and the light quantity gauge 361. Specifically, the CPU 501 determines whether the display of the predetermined emphasis effect is displayed in a position overlapping the volume gauge 360 and the light quantity gauge 361. If the determination is YES, the process proceeds to step S303, and if the determination is NO, the process returns to step S300.

In step S303, the CPU 501 moves the volume gauge 360 and the light intensity gauge 361 to a position that is not affected (does not overlap) by the display of the predetermined emphasis effect (light emission effect 310) determined to be executed in step S301. In addition, at this time, the CPU 501 may reduce the display of the volume gauge 360 and the light intensity gauge 361 depending on the space of the destination. After that, the process returns to step S300.

By controlling in the manner described above, it is possible to limit the effect of the display of a specified emphasis effect on the volume gauge 360 and the light quantity gauge 361, thereby preventing a decrease in the visibility of the volume gauge 360 and the light quantity gauge 361.

Figure 76 is a diagram illustrating another example of control to prevent a decrease in visibility of the volume gauge 360 and the light gauge 361 displayed on the main image display unit 70.

First, as shown in FIG. 76(1), a volume gauge 360 and a light quantity gauge 361 are displayed, similarly to FIG. 74(1).
Next, as shown in Fig. 76(2), when the time comes when the reach is achieved and the reach achievement highlighting effect is executed, as shown in Fig. 76(3), the reach is achieved and the reach achievement highlighting effect sound effect "Zukyuun" is output. On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 76(3), the light emitting effect 310 (see Fig. 74(2)) of the reach achievement highlighting effect is restricted and not executed.

Figure 76 is another example of a flow chart of control for preventing a decrease in visibility of the volume gauge 360 and the light gauge 361 displayed on the main image display unit 70. This is explained below.

Figure 77 is another example of a flow chart of control for preventing a decrease in visibility of the volume gauge 360 and the light gauge 361 displayed on the main image display unit 70. This is explained below.

First, in step S310 of FIG. 77, the CPU 501 of the image/audio control unit 500 determines whether the volume gauge 360 and the light quantity gauge 361 are being displayed. If the determination is YES, the process proceeds to step S311, and if the determination is NO, the process returns to step S310.

In step S311, the CPU 501 determines whether or not a predetermined emphasis effect is to be executed. The predetermined emphasis effect is, for example, one of the emphasis effects shown in Figures 57 to 66, and in the example of Figure 77, it is a reach-achi emphasis effect. Note that it may be determined whether or not all emphasis effects are to be executed, rather than a predetermined emphasis effect. If the determination is YES, the process proceeds to step S312, and if the determination is NO, the process returns to step S310.

In step S312, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the display of the predetermined emphasis effect determined to be executed in step S311 affects the volume gauge 360 and the light quantity gauge 361. Specifically, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the display of the predetermined emphasis effect is displayed in a position overlapping the volume gauge 360 and the light quantity gauge 361. If the determination is YES, the process proceeds to step S313, and if the determination is NO, the process returns to step S310.

In step S313, the CPU 501 restricts the execution of the display of the predetermined highlighting effect (lighting effect 310) that was determined to be executed in step S311. Then, the process returns to step S310.

By controlling in the manner described above, it is possible to limit the effect of the display of a specified emphasis effect on the volume gauge 360 and the light quantity gauge 361, thereby preventing a decrease in the visibility of the volume gauge 360 and the light quantity gauge 361.

In addition, while waiting for customers, during the notification presentation (during fluctuation), during the small win game presentation, and during the big win game presentation, when the up and down keys on the directional pad are operated, the scale on the volume gauge 360 goes up and down (see Figures 71 (1) and 71 (2)), and an operation sound (for example, "pico") is output, whereas when the volume up/down keys on the rear keys 170 are operated, the scale on the volume gauge 360 goes up and down (see Figures 72 (1) and 72 (2)), but no operation sound is output.
Also, the volume gauge 360 and the light gauge 361 may be displayed at all times while waiting for customers.
In addition, when the left or right key on the cross key is operated during waiting for customers, during notification performance (during fluctuation), during small win game performance, or during big win game performance, the scale of the light amount gauge 361 goes up and down (see FIG. 71 (3) (4)), and an operation sound (for example, "pico") is output. Note that the operation sound of the light amount gauge 361 and the operation sound of the volume gauge 360 may be different.
Furthermore, the operation sound of the volume gauge 360 and/or the light quantity gauge 361 may be an operation sound whose scale changes as the volume scale increases, or an operation sound whose scale is always the same may be output.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the effect of the display of a specific emphasis effect on the volume gauge 360 and the light gauge 361 can be limited, thereby preventing a decrease in the visibility of the volume gauge 360 and the light gauge 361.

Sixth Embodiment
The sixth embodiment will be described below with reference to Figures 78 to 81. In the sixth embodiment, right-hit notification and left-hit notification are performed in the gaming machine 1 according to each embodiment. The right-hit notification notifies the player that the gaming ball should be shot toward the right-side gaming area, and the left-hit notification notifies the player that the gaming ball should be shot toward the left-side gaming area.

Figure 78 is a diagram showing an example of a right-hit notification. As shown in Figure 78, a right-hit notification is issued in a situation where a right-hit should be made (sometimes called a "right-hit period"; for example, during a time-saving game state, during a jackpot game, during a small jackpot game, etc.). Specifically, a right-hit notification image 370 is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen 70, etc., as shown in Figure 78. Note that a right-hit notification may be issued during a result display (such as the number of consecutive jackpots or the total number of game balls acquired through single or consecutive jackpot games, etc.) that is executed at the end of a jackpot game or when a time-saving game state ends. Also, a right-hit notification sound ("Right hit!") may be output when the right-hit notification is started.

Fig. 79 is a diagram for explaining the left hit notification.
First, when the start condition of the left hit notification is met as shown in FIG. 79(1), the left hit notification is started as shown in FIG. 79(2). Specifically, in the center of the screen 70, the left hit notification image 371 is displayed as shown in FIG. 79(2), and the left hit notification sound ("Please return to left hit!") is output multiple times (for example, twice) (volume 9/10). The start condition of the left hit notification is a condition that a right hit is detected during a period other than the right hit period (a period in which a game ball is wasted if the game ball is hit with the right), for example, a condition that a predetermined number of game balls pass through the gate 44 in succession (for example, two game balls pass within three seconds). Note that this condition may be any condition that can detect that a right hit is being performed, and may be a condition that a predetermined number of game balls win the normal winning port 43 when the normal winning port 43 is provided only in the right game area.

Next, when the end condition for the left hit notification is met as shown in FIG. 79 (3), the left hit notification ends as shown in FIG. 79 (4). The end condition for the left hit notification is, for example, that the output of the left hit notification sound multiple times (e.g., twice) as described above (e.g., output for 5 seconds) has ended.

In addition, a warning sound may be output instead of or in addition to the left hit notification sound.
In addition, even if the cross key 18 or the like is operated (see Figures 71 and 72), the volume of the left-hit notification sound and warning sound cannot be adjusted, but the configuration may be such that the volume of the left-hit notification sound and warning sound can be adjusted by operating the cross key 18 or the like.
The left hit notification may be a two-stage notification. For example, the first left hit notification may be executed as described above under the start conditions of the left hit notification, and the second left hit notification may be executed when a condition is met that a predetermined number of game balls pass through the gate 44 in succession (for example, two game balls pass within three seconds) within a predetermined period (for example, 20 seconds) after the start of the first left hit notification. In this case, the second left hit notification may be larger in scale (for example, the display of the left hit notification may be larger, the warning sound may be louder, the notification execution time may be longer, etc.) than the first left hit notification.

Figure 80 is a time chart to explain an example of an emphasis effect (see Figures 57 to 66) that can be executed in the notification effect and an execution period of a left hit notification. The following explanation will be given with reference to Figure 80.

First, at t1, the special pattern starts to change and the notification effect (change effect) starts. Next, at t2, the start conditions for the left hit notification are met, and the left hit notification starts. Next, at t3, the special pattern stops changing, the notification effect ends, and the decorative pattern is displayed as a fixed stop. Next, at t4, the fixed stop display of the decorative pattern ends, and the special pattern starts to change and the notification effect starts. Next, at t5, the end conditions for the left hit notification are met, and the left hit notification ends. Next, at t6, the start conditions for the left hit notification are met, and the left hit notification starts. Next, at t7, the special pattern stops changing, the notification effect ends, and the decorative pattern is displayed as a fixed stop. Next, at t8, the fixed stop display of the decorative pattern ends, and since there is no notification effect to be executed next (i.e., there is no hold), the state of waiting for customers continues with the stop display of the decorative pattern (fixed stop display). Next, at t9, while waiting for customers, the condition for ending the left hit notification is met, and the left hit notification ends.

Figure 81 is an example of a flowchart for limiting the highlighting effect (see Figures 57 to 66) that is being executed during the notification effect (variable effect) when the notification effect ends. This is explained below.

First, in step S320 in FIG. 81, the CPU 501 of the image/sound control unit 500 determines whether the notification performance has ended and the decorative pattern has been displayed as a fixed stop (see t3 in FIG. 80, etc.). If the determination is YES, the process proceeds to step S321, and if the determination is NO, the process returns to step S320 again.

In step S321, the CPU 501 determines whether or not an emphasis effect (see Figures 57 to 66) is being executed. If the determination is YES, the process proceeds to step S322, and if the determination is NO, the process returns to step 320. At this point, when the notification effect ends (when the decorative pattern is no longer confirmed), each emphasis effect usually ends. However, due to a bug in the program that executes the notification effect or the effects of a processing delay related to the notification effect, an emphasis effect may be executed when the notification effect ends.

In step S322, the CPU 501 limits (forces termination of) the highlighting effect being executed. Processing then returns to step 320.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the notification effect ends (when the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped), the highlight effect being executed (see Figs. 57 to 66) is limited (forced to end). On the other hand, when the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped after the notification effect ends and while waiting for customers thereafter, the left hit notification can be executed.
In addition, after the right-hit period ends (such as when a jackpot game ends or when the time-saving game mode ends), reserved second special pattern lotteries are accumulated and are consumed in priority over reserved first special pattern lotteries. However, if it is known from advance judgment information (forward reading) that a jackpot will be won with the reserved second special pattern lotteries (so-called remaining reserved), the configuration may be such that the execution of the left-hit notification is restricted even if the start condition for the left-hit notification is met (since right-hitting will be performed again).

Seventh Embodiment
The seventh embodiment will be described below with reference to Figures 82 to 83. In the seventh embodiment, in the gaming machine 1 according to each embodiment, the movable gadget 73 and/or the effect button 16 executes an effect corresponding to (linked with) an emphasis effect (see Figures 57 to 66) or a left hit notification (see Figure 79). The following will be explained.

FIG. 82 is an example of a flowchart of this embodiment.
82, the CPU 501 of the image/sound control unit 500 determines whether or not the left hit notification is being executed. If the determination is YES, the process proceeds to step S331, and if the determination is NO, the process returns to step S330 again.

In step S331, the CPU 501 determines whether a predetermined emphasis effect (see Figures 57 to 66) is being executed. If the determination is YES, the process proceeds to step S333, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S332. Note that the above-mentioned predetermined emphasis effect is at least one of the emphasis effects described in Figures 57 to 66, etc.

In step S332, the CPU 501 instructs the lamp control unit 600 via the performance control unit 400 to execute a performance corresponding to (linked with) the left hit notification with the movable role object 73 and/or the performance button 16. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 83 (1), in response to (linked with) the left hit notification, a performance is executed in which the movable role object 73 flashes red, and also in which the performance button 16 flashes red. This makes the left hit notification more noticeable.

On the other hand, in step S333, the CPU 501 restricts the movable role 73 and/or the effect button 16 from executing an effect (linked) corresponding to a left hit notification, while executing an effect (linked) corresponding to a specified emphasis effect that is currently being executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 83 (2), the movable role 73 and the effect button 16 restrict the execution of an effect (linked) corresponding to a left hit notification, while the movable role 73 executes an effect (linked) corresponding to an active reach establishment emphasis effect (a yellow flashing effect while rotating), and the effect button 16 executes an effect (linked) corresponding to an active reach establishment emphasis effect (a yellow flashing effect while vibrating).

As described above, according to this embodiment, linked effects (effects that are linked with other effects, etc.) using movable props 73, etc. can be executed flexibly.
In addition, the movable part 73 and/or the effect button 16 may be configured not to execute (restrict) an effect corresponding to (linked to) a left hit notification (see Figure 79) while the left hit notification is being executed, regardless of whether a specified emphasis effect is executed or not.
In addition, the above-mentioned linked performance may be performed not only by the movable role object 73 and the performance button 16, but also by the board lamp 10a, the frame lamp 10, etc.

Eighth embodiment
The eighth embodiment will be described below with reference to Fig. 84. In the eighth embodiment, in the gaming machine 1 according to each embodiment, when the power supply is cut off (when the power is cut off), the lights are prevented from being turned off at the same time. The following will be described.

Figure 84 is a diagram showing an example of the order in which each part goes out when the gaming machine 1 loses power. As shown in Figure 84, when power is lost, the main image display unit 70 and the sub-image display unit 71 go out first, then the lamps of the movable role piece 73 and the performance button 16 go out. After that, the board lamp 10a and the raku lamp 10 go out, the sub information display 80 goes out, and then the main information display 59 goes out.

As described above, in this embodiment, when power is interrupted, control is performed to prevent each part from turning off at the same time, and each part turns off in a predetermined order. Here, in amusement stores, the lights in the store may be dimmed to make the performance of the gaming machine 1 feel more powerful. In such cases, particularly when the gaming machine 1 loses power and each part of the gaming machine turns off at the same time, the player may be surprised and may be psychologically burdened. Therefore, in this embodiment, control is performed to turn off each part in order when power is interrupted, thereby reducing the psychological burden on the player.
The timing (order) in which each part is turned off when the power is cut off is not limited to the above, and may be an order according to the function of each part, etc. Similarly, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is restored and each part is turned on, each part may be turned on in a predetermined order.

Ninth embodiment
The ninth embodiment will be described below with reference to Figures 85 to 87. The ninth embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the contents of the big win and the game state are different, and a miss (special miss) that grants time reduction is added. The ninth embodiment is also characterized by the control of the background image.

Figure 85 is a diagram for explaining an example of a game flow in the ninth embodiment. In the ninth embodiment, the gaming machine 1 has a total of eight types of jackpots: five types of first type jackpots and three types of second type jackpots. When a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, a jackpot game for the first type jackpot is executed as the special game. When a small jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, a small jackpot game is executed, and when the game ball enters the specific area 224 (see Figure 2) during the small jackpot game, a jackpot game for the second type jackpot is executed as the special game. The eight types of jackpots are as follows:

"First class 10R A"
This jackpot can be won by a first special symbol lottery, and in this jackpot game, round games from round 1 to round 10 are played. In each round game, the first large prize winning port 50 is opened until the number of winning balls in the first large prize winning port 50 reaches a specified number (e.g., 9 balls) or a specified time (e.g., 29 seconds) has elapsed, and then the first large prize winning port 50 is closed for 2 seconds.

The game states in this embodiment include a normal game state and a low base time-saving game state in which the game is played by hitting from the left, and a high base time-saving game state in which the game is played by hitting from the right. As shown in FIG. 85, if the first type 10R hit A occurs in the normal game state, the game state after the special game will return to the normal game state. If the first type 10R hit A occurs in the low base time-saving game state, the game state after the special game will return to the low base time-saving game state. The number of time-saving times (B) when the game enters the low base time-saving game state after the first type 10R hit A jackpot game is 500 times.

In the normal game state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "normal state"), the normal symbol variation time is 60 seconds, and the opening time of the opening/closing member 48 (see Figure 1) of the second starting hole 47 per winning normal symbol lottery is 0.1 seconds.

In the low base time-saving game state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "low base time-saving state"), the normal symbol fluctuation time is 59 seconds, and the opening time of the opening/closing member 48 per normal symbol lottery win is 0.11 seconds.

In the high base time-saving game state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "high base time-saving state"), the normal symbol fluctuation time is 5 seconds, and the opening time of the opening/closing member 48 per normal symbol lottery win is 6 seconds.

Here, the difference between the normal symbol fluctuation time in the low base time-saving state and the normal symbol fluctuation time in the normal state is only 1 second, and the advantage of the auxiliary game in the low base time-saving state (a game in which the normal symbol lottery is won and the opening and closing member 48 is opened, making it possible to win at the second starting hole) is almost the same as the advantage of the auxiliary game in the normal state. The normal symbol fluctuation time in the high base time-saving state is 50 seconds or more shorter than the normal symbol fluctuation time in the normal state and the low base time-saving state, and the advantage of the auxiliary game in the high base time-saving state is higher than the advantage of the auxiliary game in the normal state and the low base time-saving state.
In addition, the difference in the opening time of the opening/closing member 48 when the normal symbol lottery is won between the low base time-saving state and the normal state is only 0.01 seconds, and from this, the advantage of the auxiliary game in the low base time-saving state is almost the same as the advantage of the auxiliary game in the normal state. Also, the opening time in the high base time-saving state is about 5 seconds longer than the opening time in the normal state and the low base time-saving state, and from this, the advantage of the auxiliary game in the high base time-saving state is higher than the advantage of the auxiliary game in the normal state and the low base time-saving state.
From the above, if the normal state is defined as the first normal state, the low base time-saving state can be said to be the second normal state which has a higher advantage in terms of auxiliary play than the first normal state, and the high base time-saving state can be said to be the time-saving state which has an even higher advantage in terms of auxiliary play than the second normal state.

"Type 1 2R B"
This jackpot can be won with the first special symbol, and in this jackpot game, round games from the first round to the second round are played. In each round game, the first large prize winning opening 50 is opened until the number of winning balls in the first large prize winning opening 50 reaches a specified number or a specified time has elapsed, and then the first large prize winning opening 50 is closed for two seconds.

As shown in FIG. 85, if a first type 2R hit B occurs in the normal state, the game state after the jackpot game will return to the normal state. If a first type 2R hit B occurs in the low base time-saving state, the game state after the jackpot game will return to the normal state.

"Type 1 2R C"
This jackpot can be won with the first special symbol, and in this jackpot game, round games from the first round to the second round are played. In each round game, the first large prize winning opening 50 is opened until the number of winning balls in the first large prize winning opening 50 reaches a specified number or a specified time has elapsed, and then the first large prize winning opening 50 is closed for two seconds.

As shown in FIG. 85, when the first type 2R per C is reached in the normal state, the game state after the jackpot play will be in the high base time-saving state. The number of time-saving times (J) when the high base time-saving state is reached after the first type 2R per C jackpot play is 100 times. When the first type 2R per C is reached in the low base time-saving state, the game state after the jackpot play will again be in the low base time-saving state. The number of time-saving times (B) when the low base time-saving state is reached after the first type 2R per C special play is 700 times.

"Type 1 10R per F"
This jackpot can be won with the second special symbol, and in this jackpot game, round games from the first round to the tenth round are played. In each round game, the first large prize winning opening 50 is opened until the number of winning balls in the first large prize winning opening 50 reaches a specified number or a specified time has elapsed, and then the first large prize winning opening 50 is closed for two seconds.

As shown in Figure 85, if the first type 10R F is reached in the high base time-saving state, the game state after the jackpot game will return to the high base time-saving state. The number of time-saving times (J) when the high base time-saving state is reached after the first type 10R F jackpot game is reached is 100 times.

"Type 1 2R per G"
This jackpot can be won with the second special symbol, and in this jackpot game, round games from the first round to the second round are played. In each round game, the first large prize winning opening 50 is opened until the number of winning balls in the first large prize winning opening 50 reaches a specified number or a specified time has elapsed, and then the first large prize winning opening 50 is closed for two seconds.

As shown in Figure 85, if the first type 2R G is reached in the high base time-saving state, the game state after the jackpot game will return to the high base time-saving state. The number of time-saving times (J) when the high base time-saving state is reached after the first type 2R G jackpot game is reached is 100 times.

"Type 2 actual 9R per H"
This jackpot can be won with the second special symbol, and in this jackpot game, after the small jackpot game, which is essentially the first round, and winning in the specific area 224, round games from the second round to the tenth round are played. In each round game, the first large prize winning port 50 is opened until the number of winning balls in the first large prize winning port 50 reaches a specified number or a specified time has elapsed, and then the first large prize winning port 50 is closed for two seconds.

As shown in Figure 85, if the second type actual 9R H is reached in the high base time-saving state, the game state after the jackpot game will return to the high base time-saving state. The number of time-saving times (J) when the high base time-saving state is reached after the second type actual 9R H jackpot game is reached is 100 times.

"Type 2 actual 2R I"
This big win can be won with the second special symbol, and in this big win game, the second and third rounds of round play are played after the small win game, which is essentially the first round, and winning in the specific area 224. In each round of play, the first large prize winning port 50 is opened until the number of winning balls in the first large prize winning port 50 reaches a specified number or a specified time has elapsed, and then the first large prize winning port 50 is closed for two seconds.

As shown in Figure 85, if the high base time-saving state is reached when the second type actual 2R hit I is reached, the game state after the jackpot game will return to the high base time-saving state. The number of time-saving times (J) when the high base time-saving state is reached after the second type actual 2R hit I jackpot game is reached will be 100 times.

"Type 2 Real 9R Win J"
This jackpot can be won with the second special symbol, and in this jackpot game, after the small jackpot game, which is essentially the first round, and winning in the specific area 224, round games from the second round to the tenth round are played. In each round game, the first large prize winning port 50 is opened until the number of winning balls in the first large prize winning port 50 reaches a specified number or a specified time has elapsed, and then the first large prize winning port 50 is closed for two seconds.

As shown in Figure 85, if the second type actual 9R hit J occurs during the high base time-saving state, the game state after the jackpot game will be in the normal state. In other words, in this embodiment, if the first type actual 10R hit F, the first type actual 10R hit G, the second type actual 9R hit H, or the second type actual 2R hit I occurs during the high base time-saving state, the most advantageous high base time-saving state will continue, but if the second type actual 9R hit J occurs, it will return to the normal state.

In addition, in this embodiment, there are four types of special misses. The special misses are special misses that can only be selected in the first special pattern lottery. The four types of special misses are as follows:

"High base time-saving special miss a"
As shown in Fig. 85, when the special miss a occurs in the normal state, the high base time-saving state is entered. The number of time-saving times (J) when the high base time-saving state is entered after the special miss a is 100 times.

"Low base time-saving special miss b"
As shown in Fig. 85, when the special miss b occurs in the normal state, the state becomes a low base time-saving state. The number of time-saving times (B) when the state becomes a low base time-saving state through the special miss b is 700 times.

"Low base time-saving special miss c"
As shown in FIG. 85, when the special miss c occurs in the normal state, the state becomes a low base time-saving state. The number of time-saving times (B) when the state becomes a low base time-saving state through the special miss c is 500 times.

"Low base time-saving special miss d"
As shown in Fig. 85, when the special miss d occurs in the normal state, the state becomes a low base time-saving state. The number of time-saving times (B) when the state becomes a low base time-saving state after the special miss d is 300 times.

Any miss other than the four types of special misses mentioned above is a normal miss. Stopping on a normal miss pattern in itself does not trigger a change in the game state. However, as shown in Figure 85, if the variable display that stops on a normal miss pattern continues for 900 times during a game state that is not in the high base time-saving state, the game state will change to the high base time-saving state after the 900th pattern stops. The number of time-saving times (J) when the high base time-saving state is reached after 900 normal misses is 100.

As mentioned above, the low base time-saving state has a higher advantage in terms of auxiliary play than the normal state. However, as shown in FIG. 85, in the low base time-saving state, no matter what the special symbol stops on, it does not enter the high base time-saving state, whereas in the normal state, when the special symbol stops on the symbol of the first type 2R hit C, the high base time-saving state is entered after the end of the big win game, and when it stops on the symbol of the high base time-saving activation special miss a, the high base time-saving state is entered immediately. Therefore, in terms of the ease of entering the high base time-saving state, the normal state has a higher advantage than the low base time-saving state. Therefore, in this embodiment, the player hopes to stay in the normal state during the normal state and get many opportunities to advance to the high base time-saving state by winning the symbol of the first type 2R hit C or the high base time-saving activation special miss a. Additionally, during the low base time-saving state, the player hopes to either hit the B symbol per Type 1 2R as quickly as possible, or to resolve the fluctuation in the low base time-saving count (B) and proceed to the normal state.

Here, in the store where the gaming machine 1 is installed, the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off before closing time, and the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned back on before opening the next day, which is a daily operation. When the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (for example, before closing time), the main control unit 100 backs up information indicating the game status, etc., in the ROM 102, and when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned back on (for example, before opening the next day), the main control unit 100 restores the game status, etc., at the time of the power cut (on the previous day), and transmits to the performance control unit 400 a power restoration command (restore notification command) and a game status command (game status notification command) indicating the game status in which the power was restored to the game control unit 400.

If the game state was normal when the power was cut off (power outage) before closing the previous day, the power will be restored in normal state immediately after the power is turned on the next day, and if the game state was low base time-saving state when the power was cut off before closing the previous day, the power will be restored in low base time-saving state immediately after the power is turned on the next day. However, if the RAM is cleared by a store employee or other person when the power is turned on, the power will be restored in normal state.

When power is restored in the normal state, the main control unit 100 transmits a power restoration command and a game state command corresponding to the normal state to the presentation control unit 400, and when power is restored in the low base time-saving state, the main control unit 100 transmits a game state command corresponding to the low base time-saving state to the presentation control unit 400.

Next, the control of the background image of the notification effect (variable effect) that is executed after the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on will be described.
Immediately after the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the performance control unit 400 causes the main image display unit 70 to display a background image of an evening background (evening background) which is the background of the normal state (or a background image of a daytime background which is the background of the low base time-saving state) as a background image (background image of the notification performance) common to the normal state and the low base time-saving state, regardless of whether the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is restored in the normal state or in the low base time-saving state. Note that the background of the high base time-saving state is a night background.

Figure 86 is a diagram to explain an example of the control of the background image of the notification effect (variable effect) that starts after the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1.

Figure 86 (1) explains the case where the power is restored when the gaming machine 1 is in the normal state. As shown in Figure 86 (1), when the power is turned on at t1, the main control unit 100 transmits a power-on command to the performance control unit 400. Next, at t2, the main control unit 100 transmits a power restoration command to the performance control unit 400. This power restoration command includes information indicating that the state is normal. Next, at t3, the main control unit 100 transmits a game state command indicating the normal state to the performance control unit 400, and the performance control unit 400 (instructs the image and audio control unit 500) displays an evening background (the original background) as the background image. Next, at t4, the notification performance (variable performance) is started, and the main control unit 100 transmits a game state command indicating the normal state to the performance control unit 400. Next, at t5, the notification performance ends, and the main control unit 100 transmits a game state command indicating the normal state to the performance control unit 400. Next, at t6, the notification performance is started, and a game state command indicating the normal state is sent from the main control unit 100 to the performance control unit 400. Next, at t7, the notification performance is ended, and the game state is switched from the normal state to the low base time-saving state, and a game state command indicating the low base time-saving state is sent from the main control unit 100 to the performance control unit 400, and the performance control unit 400 switches the background image to a daytime background (a background different from the original background). Next, at t8, the notification performance is started, and a game state command indicating the low base time-saving state is sent from the main control unit 100 to the performance control unit 400. Next, at t9, the notification performance is started, and a game state command indicating the low base time-saving state is sent from the main control unit 100 to the performance control unit 400. Next, at t10, the notification performance is started, and a game state command indicating the low base time-saving state is sent from the main control unit 100 to the performance control unit 400.

Figure 86 (2) explains the case where the power is restored when the gaming machine 1 is in a low base time-saving state. As shown in Figure 86 (2), when the power is turned on at t1, the main control unit 100 transmits a power-on command to the performance control unit 400. Next, at t2, the main control unit 100 transmits a power restoration command to the performance control unit 400. This power restoration command includes information indicating that the low base time-saving state is in effect. Next, at t3, the main control unit 100 transmits a game state command indicating the low base time-saving state to the performance control unit 400, and the performance control unit 400 (instructs the image and audio control unit 500) to display an evening background (a background different from the original background) as the background image. Next, at t4, a notification performance (variable performance) is started, and a game state command indicating the low base time-saving state is transmitted from the main control unit 100 to the performance control unit 400, but the performance control unit 400 continues (maintains) the display of the evening background (a background different from the original background) as the background image. Next, at t5, the notification performance ends, and the main control unit 100 transmits a game status command indicating a low base time-shortening state to the performance control unit 400, but the performance control unit 400 continues (maintains) the display of an evening background (a background different from the original background) as a background image. Next, at t6, the notification performance starts, and the main control unit 100 transmits a game status command indicating a low base time-shortening state to the performance control unit 400, but the performance control unit 400 continues (maintains) the display of an evening background (a background different from the original background) as a background image. In this way, the performance control unit 400 continues (maintains) the display of an evening background (a background different from the original background) as a background image, even if a game status command indicating a low base time-shortening state is transmitted, from the time the power is restored until the notification performance is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times). Then, at t9, the 30th notification performance ends, and the main control unit 100 sends a game status command indicating a low base time-saving state to the performance control unit 400, and the performance control unit 400 switches the background image to a daytime background (original background). Next, at t10, the notification performance starts, the main control unit 100 sends a game status command indicating a low base time-saving state to the performance control unit 400, and the performance control unit 400 continues to display the daytime background (original background).

As described above (see FIG. 86 (1)), when the game state immediately after the gaming machine 1 is powered on is normal, the performance control unit 400 selects the evening background, which is the original background for the normal state, and causes the background image of the evening background to be displayed on the main image display unit 70. Thereafter, the performance control unit 400 maintains the display of the background image of the evening background until it receives a game state command for the low base time-saving state, and when it receives a game state command for the low base time-saving state, it changes the background to a daytime background (original background) in accordance with the game state command.

As described above (see FIG. 86 (2)), when the game state immediately after the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on is the low base time-saving state, the performance control unit 400 selects an evening background (a background different from the original background) which is the same background as the normal state, and displays the background image of the evening background on the main image display unit 70. After that, the performance control unit 400 sets 30 fluctuations of the special symbol (30 executions of the notification effect) as a predetermined condition for returning to the original background, and until the 30 fluctuations of the special symbol are completed, even if a game state command for the low base time-saving state is received while the same background image as the normal state is being displayed, the game state command is ignored for the display of the background image, and the display of the background image of the evening background is maintained. When the 30 fluctuations of the special symbol are completed and the predetermined condition is satisfied, the background is returned to the original one, and when a game state command for the normal state is received, a background image of the evening background which is the background corresponding to the normal state is displayed, and when a game state command for the low base time-saving state is received, a background image of the day background which is the background corresponding to the low base time-saving state is displayed.

Figure 87 is a diagram to explain another example of the control of the background image of the notification effect (variable effect) that starts after the gaming machine 1 is powered on.

Figure 87 (1) explains the case where the power is restored when the gaming machine 1 is in a normal state. As shown in Figure 87 (2), when the power is turned on at t1, the main control unit 100 transmits a power-on command to the performance control unit 400. Next, at t2, the main control unit 100 transmits a power restoration command to the performance control unit 400. This power restoration command includes information indicating that the state is normal. Next, at t3, the main control unit 100 transmits a game state command indicating the normal state to the performance control unit 400, and the performance control unit 400 (instructs the image and audio control unit 500) to display a daytime background (a background different from the original background) as the background image. Next, at t4, the notification performance (variable performance) is started, and a game state command indicating the normal state is transmitted from the main control unit 100 to the performance control unit 400, but the performance control unit 400 continues (maintains) the display of the daytime background (a background different from the original background) as the background image. Next, at t5, the notification performance ends, and the main control unit 100 transmits a game status command indicating the normal state to the performance control unit 400, but the performance control unit 400 continues (maintains) the display of the day background (a background different from the original background) as the background image. Next, at t6, the notification performance starts, and the main control unit 100 transmits a game status command indicating the normal state to the performance control unit 400, but the performance control unit 400 continues (maintains) the display of the day background (a background different from the original background) as the background image. In this way, the performance control unit 400 continues (maintains) the display of the day background (a background different from the original background) as the background image, even if a game status command indicating the normal state is transmitted, from the time the power is restored until the notification performance is executed 30 times. Then, at t9, the 30th notification performance ends, and the main control unit 100 transmits a game status command indicating the normal state to the performance control unit 400, and the performance control unit 400 switches the background image to the evening background (the original background). Next, at t10, the notification presentation starts, the main control unit 100 sends a game state command indicating the normal state to the presentation control unit 400, and the presentation control unit 400 continues to display the daytime background (the original background).

Figure 87 (2) explains the case where the power is restored when the gaming machine 1 is in a low base time-saving state. As shown in Figure 87 (2), when the power is turned on at t1, the main control unit 100 transmits a power-on command to the performance control unit 400. Next, at t2, the main control unit 100 transmits a power restoration command to the performance control unit 400. This power restoration command includes information indicating that the game is in a low base time-saving state. Next, at t3, the main control unit 100 transmits a game status command indicating a low base time-saving state to the performance control unit 400, and the performance control unit 400 (instructs the image and audio control unit 500) displays a daytime background (original background) as a background image. Next, at t4, a notification performance (variable performance) is started, and a game status command indicating a low base time-saving state is transmitted from the main control unit 100 to the performance control unit 400. Next, at t5, the notification performance ends, and a game status command indicating a low base time-saving state is transmitted from the main control unit 100 to the performance control unit 400. Next, at t6, the notification performance is started, and a game state command indicating the low base time-saving state is sent from the main control unit 100 to the performance control unit 400. Next, at t7, the notification performance is ended, the game state is switched from the low base time-saving state to the normal state, and a game state command indicating the normal state is sent from the main control unit 100 to the performance control unit 400, and the performance control unit 400 switches the background image to an evening background (original background). Next, at t8, the notification performance is started, and a game state command indicating the normal state is sent from the main control unit 100 to the performance control unit 400. Next, at t9, the notification performance is started, and a game state command indicating the normal state is sent from the main control unit 100 to the performance control unit 400. Next, at t10, the notification performance is started, and a game state command indicating the normal state is sent from the main control unit 100 to the performance control unit 400.

As described above (see FIG. 87(1)), when the game state immediately after the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on is the normal state, the performance control unit 400 selects the daytime background, which is the same background as the low base time-saving state, and displays the background image of the daytime background on the main image display unit 70. After that, the performance control unit 400 sets the predetermined condition for returning to the original background to the predetermined number (30 times) of changes of the special pattern (30 executions of the notification effect), and until the 30 changes of the special pattern are completed, even if a game state designation command for the normal state is received while the background image identical to the low base time-saving state is being displayed, the performance control unit 400 ignores the game state designation command and maintains the display of the daytime background background image. When the 30 changes of the special pattern are completed and the predetermined condition is met, the background is returned to the original one, and when a game state designation command for the low base time-saving state is received, the background image of the daytime background, which is the background corresponding to the low base time-saving state, is displayed, and when a game state designation command for the normal state is received, the background image of the evening background, which is the background corresponding to the normal state, is displayed.

As described above (see FIG. 87 (2)), when the gaming state immediately after the gaming machine 1 is powered on is a low base time-saving state, the performance control unit 400 selects a daytime background, which is the original background for the low base time-saving state, and causes the background image of the daytime background to be displayed on the main image display unit 70. After that, the performance control unit 400 maintains the display of the background image of the daytime background until it receives a gaming state designation command for the normal state, and when it receives a gaming state designation command for the normal state, it changes the background to an evening background in accordance with the gaming state designation command.

As described above, according to this embodiment, immediately after the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, regardless of whether the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is restored in the normal state or in the low base time-saving state, the background image of the evening background (evening background) which is the background of the normal state (or the background image of the daytime background which is the background of the low base time-saving state) is displayed on the main image display unit 70 as a background image (background image of the notification effect) common to the normal state and the low base time-saving state. As a result, immediately after the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, it becomes difficult (or impossible) to tell whether the state is normal or the low base time-saving state (see FIG. 85), improving the interest of the game.
In addition, immediately after the gaming machine 1 is turned on, an image of a background (for example, a starry background) different from either the evening background which is the original background of the normal state or the daytime background which is the original background of the low base time-saving state may be displayed on the main image display unit 70 as a presentation image common to the normal state and the low base time-saving state.

Tenth embodiment
The tenth embodiment will be described below with reference to Fig. 88. In the tenth embodiment, when the notification effect (variable effect) is started from the customer waiting state in the gaming machine 1 according to each embodiment, a unique effect is performed in the decorative pattern. The following will be described.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88(1), while waiting for customers, the decorative pattern number 701 is stationary (stopped), while the character 702 is performing a performance action (e.g., moving its arms). The character 702 is displayed behind (at the back of) the number 701.

When the notification effect starts, as shown in FIG. 88 (2), the decorative pattern numbers 701 perform a swinging motion, and the character 702 continues (maintains) the effect motion as is.

According to this embodiment, while waiting for customers, the impression that the station is deserted can be avoided by having the character 702 perform a special action, while the number 701 in front of the character 702 is displayed as a still image, making it clear that the station is waiting for customers and no notification action is being carried out.
Then, when the notification performance starts, the number 701 starts to swing, clearly indicating that the notification performance has started, while the performance action of the character 702 continues (maintains) as is, giving the impression that the notification performance has started smoothly and without interruption from waiting for customers.

Eleventh Embodiment
An eleventh embodiment of the present invention will be described below. In the eleventh embodiment, various examples related to the configurations (features) of the above-described embodiments will be described below.

Figure 89 is a diagram for explaining an example of an identification image 380 for identifying a presentation mode. A presentation mode is a presentation mode (stage of presentation) executed in different game states or the same game state, and for example, a unique background image is displayed for each presentation mode. As shown in Figure 89 (1), the identification image 380 is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen 70 to notify the current presentation mode (sometimes simply called "mode" or "stage"). Also, as shown in Figures 89 (2) and (3), the identification image 380 includes a specification section 382 indicating the presentation mode name and an emphasis section 383 that emphasizes the specification section 382 by decorating or the like. It is possible to make the display mode of the emphasis section 383 different between the first presentation mode (for example, the first stage in the normal game state) and the second presentation mode (for example, the stage in the time-saving game state, the second stage in the normal game state, etc.). In addition, the display mode of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 and the mode of the sound output (notification mode) can be the same between the first and second presentation modes.

Also, the identification image 380 described using FIG. 89 may be configured to include a specification section 382 indicating the zone name (name of the zone effect) and an emphasis section 383 for emphasizing the specification section 382 by decoration or the like. Also, the identification image 380 may be a right-hit notification image 370 (FIG. 78) and may be configured to include a specification section 382 that is a text image "right hit" and an emphasis section 383 for emphasizing the specification section 382 by decoration or the like (for example, an image of an arrow, other decorative image, etc.). Also, the identification image 380 may be a left-hit notification image 370 (FIG. 79) and may be configured to include a specification section 382 that is a text image "left hit" and an emphasis section 383 for emphasizing the specification section 382 by decoration or the like (for example, an image of an arrow, other decorative image, etc.).
Furthermore, it is possible to differ the display mode of the highlighting portion 383 of the first identification image 380 (e.g., an identification image indicating the presentation mode name) between the first presentation mode (e.g., the first stage of the normal game state or the time-saving game state) and the second presentation mode (e.g., the second stage of the normal game state or the time-saving game state), and it is also possible to differ the display mode of the highlighting portion 383 of the second identification image 380 (e.g., the right-hit notification image 370).

It is also possible to make the presentation mode (character movement, light emission effects, etc.) of the temporary stop emphasis presentation (Fig. 32) different between the first mode (first stage in normal game mode) and the second mode (stage in time-saving game mode, second stage in normal game mode, etc.). It is also possible to make the display mode of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 and the mode of its sound output (notification mode) common between the first mode and the second mode. It is also possible to make the display mode of the right hit notification, left hit notification, etc. (Figs. 78, 79) and the mode of its sound output (notification mode) common between the first mode and the second mode.

It is also possible to make the presentation mode (such as character movement and light emission effects) of the reach achievement highlighting effect (Figure 43) different between the first mode (first stage in normal game mode) and the second mode (stage in time-saving game mode, second stage in normal game mode, etc.). It is also possible to make the display mode of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 and the mode of its sound output (alert mode) the same between the first mode and the second mode. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute a unique reach achievement highlighting effect corresponding to the first mode, and execute a unique reach achievement highlighting effect corresponding to the second mode (this feature is not limited to reach achievement highlighting effects and may be applied to other highlighting effects).

In addition, it is possible to have different emphasis effects (e.g., Fig. 40 (4) (7), Fig. 51 (2) (5)) that emphasize the intermediate decorative pattern that temporarily stops at the end after a reach is achieved between the first mode (first stage in normal game mode) and the second mode (stage in time-saving game mode, second stage in normal game mode, etc.). In addition, it is possible to have the same display mode of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 and the mode of their sound output (alert mode) between the first mode and the second mode.

In addition, in the notification effect of a reach miss (Figs. 38 to 40), it is possible to make the emphasis effect (Fig. 40 (4)) that emphasizes the central decorative pattern of a miss that is temporarily stopped at the end after the reach is established different between the first mode (first stage of the normal game state) and the second mode (stage of the time-saving game state, second stage of the normal game state, etc.). Also, it is possible to make the display mode of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 and the mode of their sound output (notification mode) the same between the first mode and the second mode.

In addition, in a particular mode (such as the first stage in normal game mode), it is possible to make the emphasis mode (character movement, light emission effect, etc.) different between the temporary stop emphasis effect (Fig. 32) of the first decorative symbol (e.g., the "6" symbol; Figs. 22 and 23) and the temporary stop emphasis effect of the second effect symbol (e.g., the "7" symbol).

In addition, in a particular mode (for example, the first stage in normal game mode), it is possible to make the emphasis mode (character movement, light emission effect, etc.; Figure 43) different between the emphasis effect (for example, the reach achievement emphasis effect) of a particular first decorative pattern (for example, the left decorative pattern of a "6" pattern) and the emphasis effect (for example, the reach achievement emphasis effect) of a predetermined first decorative pattern (for example, the left decorative pattern of a "7" pattern). Also, in a particular mode, it is possible to make the display mode of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 and the mode of its sound output (alert mode) the same when the first decorative pattern is displayed and when the second decorative pattern is displayed.

In addition, in a specific mode (e.g., the first stage in normal game mode), it is possible to make the emphasis mode (character movement, light emission effect, etc.; FIG. 43) different between the temporary stop emphasis performance of the first decorative symbol (e.g., the left decorative symbol) and the temporary stop emphasis performance of the second decorative symbol (e.g., the middle decorative symbol). In addition, in a specific mode, it is possible to make the display mode of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 and the mode of its sound output (alert mode) the same when the first decorative symbol is displayed and when the second decorative symbol is displayed.

In addition, the decorative patterns displayed in specific areas (such as the display area for the left decorative pattern and the display area for the center pattern) include a first performance pattern (e.g., a left decorative pattern of a "6" pattern) and a second performance pattern (e.g., a left decorative pattern of a "7" pattern), and in a specific mode (e.g., the first stage in normal play mode), it is possible to make the emphasis mode (character movement, light-emitting effects, etc.; Figures 44 and 45) different between the emphasis mode for the first decorative pattern when a double number is formed and the emphasis mode for the second decorative pattern when a double number is formed. In addition, in a specific mode, it is possible to make the display mode of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 and the mode of its sound output (alert mode) the same when the first decorative pattern is displayed and when the second decorative pattern is displayed.

It is also possible to make the emphasis mode (e.g., the operation of the button image, the light emitting effect before or after the button image is displayed, etc.) of the button image emphasis mode (Figure 67, etc.) different before and after the start of a special effect (e.g., a reach establishment effect, a SP reach development effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, etc.) in the notification effect (variable effect). It is also possible to make the display mode of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 and the mode of its sound output (notification mode) the same before and after the start of a special effect in the notification effect. Furthermore, it is possible to make the display mode of the right hit notification image 370/left hit notification image 371 (Figures 78, 79) and the mode of its sound output (notification mode) the same before and after the start of a special effect in the notification effect.

It is also possible to make the emphasis mode (e.g., the operation of the button image (including the speed at which the button image is repeatedly hit), the light emission effect, etc.) of the button image emphasis performance (Fig. 67, etc.) different between the first mode (e.g., during normal game play) and the second mode (e.g., during time-saving game play). It is also possible to make the display mode of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 and the mode of its sound output (notification mode) common between the first mode and the second mode. Furthermore, it is possible to make the display mode of the right hit notification image 370/left hit notification image 371 (Figs. 78, 79) and the mode of its sound output (notification mode) common between the first mode and the second mode.

It is also possible to make the highlighting mode of the button image highlighting mode (e.g., button image operation, light emission effect, etc.; Figs. 67 to 69, etc.) different between the first operation performance in which a button image is displayed (Fig. 67, etc.) and the second operation performance. It is also possible to make the display mode of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 and the mode of its sound output (notification mode) common between the first operation performance (e.g., a white button image that does not indicate a jackpot reliability, a one-push operation (Fig. 67), etc.) and the second operation performance (e.g., a red button image that indicates a high jackpot reliability, a repeated tap operation or a long press operation (Figs. 68, 69), etc.)). Furthermore, it is possible to make the display mode of the right hit notification image 370/left hit notification image 371 (Figs. 78, 79) and the mode of its sound output (notification mode) common between the first operation performance and the second operation performance.

In addition, it is possible to make the light emitting effect and protruding action (and its execution time) of the button highlighting effect (e.g., FIG. 67, etc.) different between the first vibration effect (e.g., short-time vibration) and the second vibration effect (e.g., long-time vibration) of the button highlighting effect. In addition, it is possible to make the display mode of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 and the mode of its sound output (alert mode) the same when the first vibration effect is being executed and when the second vibration effect is being executed.

In addition, it is possible to execute highlight effects (for example, highlight effects for highlighting the formation of a double number, highlight effects suggesting that a pattern has been confirmed, highlight colors for highlighting a jackpot (rainbow highlighting), etc.) that can be executed during the execution of effects that suggest or notify a jackpot (such as a temporary stop of a double number), and it is possible to differ the manner of the highlight effects between the first mode (for example, the stage in the normal game state) and the second mode (for example, the stage in the time-saving game state). In addition, it is possible to make the display manner of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 and the manner of their sound output (notification manner) the same between the first mode and the second mode.

In addition, images of effects that anticipate a jackpot (e.g., cut-in announcements, zone effects, etc.; Figure 38 (5), Figure 50, etc.) can be enhanced with effects (e.g., light-emitting effects, action effects, etc.), and the image may be configured to have a first mode (e.g., white characters) and a second mode (e.g., red characters) that has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the first mode.
It is possible to make the mode of the emphasis effect different between the first mode and the second mode of the image of the effect expecting a big win. Also, it is possible to make the display mode of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 and the mode of the sound output (notification mode) the same when the image of the effect expecting a big win is executed in the first mode and when it is executed in the second mode.

It is also possible to make the appearance of the movable role highlighting effect (e.g., FIG. 83) different before and after the start of a special effect in the notification effect (e.g., a reach establishment effect, a SP reach development effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, etc.). It is also possible to make the display appearance of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 and the appearance of its sound output (notification appearance) the same before and after the start of a special effect in the notification effect.

In addition, in the performance images that anticipate a jackpot (e.g., cut-in notices, zone effects, changes in reserved icons; Figures 25, 38 (5), 50, etc.), emphasis effects (e.g., light-emitting effects, action effects, etc.) can be executed, and there are first performance images (e.g., cut-in notices and zone effects that display text) and second performance images (e.g., changes in reserved icons). The first performance image may have a first aspect (white text aspect) and a second aspect (red text aspect), and the second performance image may have a third aspect (white icon) and a fourth aspect (red icon). It is possible to make the aspect of the emphasis effect different between the second aspect (red text) of the first performance image and the fourth aspect (red icon) of the second performance image. In addition, the display mode of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 and the mode of its sound output (notification mode) can be made the same when the first performance image of the second aspect is displayed and when the second performance image of the fourth aspect is displayed.

It is also possible to make the time for the button image highlighting effect (Figs. 67-69) to change (for example, the time for the button image to be tapped repeatedly or to flash; Fig. 68, etc.) different before and after the start of a special effect in the notification effect (for example, a reach establishment effect, a SP reach development effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, etc.). It is also possible to make the display mode of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 and the mode of its sound output (notification mode) the same before and after the start of a special effect in the notification effect. Furthermore, it is possible to make the display mode of the right hit notification image 370/left hit notification image 371 (Figs. 78, 79) and the mode of its sound output (notification mode) the same before and after the start of a special effect in the notification effect.

It is also possible to make the time for the mode of the button image highlighting effect (Figs. 67 to 69) to change (for example, the time for the button image to be repeatedly tapped or blinked; Fig. 68, etc.) different from the time for the display of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 (or the right hit notification image 370/left hit notification image 371) or the notification time due to the sound output.

It is also possible to make the time for the button image emphasis effect to change (for example, the time for the button image to be repeatedly pressed or blinked; Fig. 68, etc.) different between the first emphasis effect (for example, a white button image that does not indicate a high probability of a jackpot, the effect in the case of a single press (Fig. 67)) and the second emphasis effect (for example, a red button image that indicates a high probability of a jackpot, the effect in the case of a repeated press or long press (Figs. 68, 69)) of the button image emphasis effects (Figs. 67 to 69). It is also possible to make the display of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 (or right-hit notification image 370/left-hit notification image 371) and the notification time by the sound output the same when the first emphasis effect is being executed and when the second emphasis effect is being executed.

It is also possible to make the time for the button image highlighting effect to change (for example, the time for the button image to be repeatedly tapped or blinked; see FIG. 68, etc.) different between the first mode (for example, during normal game play) and the second mode (for example, during time-saving game play). It is also possible to make the display of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 and the notification time by sound output the same between the first mode and the second mode.

It is also possible to execute emphasis effects (e.g., arrow display, arrow movement display, light-emitting effect display, etc.) that emphasize the right-hit notification image 370 and emphasis effects (e.g., arrow display, arrow movement display, light-emitting effect display, etc.) that emphasize the left-hit notification image 371, and to make the execution time of the emphasis effects different between the right-hit notification image 370 and the left-hit notification image 371. It is also possible to make the display of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 and the notification time by the sound output the same when the right-hit notification image 370 is displayed and when the left-hit notification image 371 is displayed.

In addition, it is possible to execute highlight effects (e.g., highlight effects for highlighting the formation of a double number, highlight effects suggesting that a pattern has been confirmed, highlight colors for highlighting a jackpot (rainbow highlight), etc.) that can be executed during the execution of effects that suggest or notify a jackpot (e.g., a temporary stop of a double number, etc.), and it is possible to make the execution time of the highlight effects different between the first mode (e.g., during normal play mode) and the second mode (e.g., during time-saving play mode). In addition, it is possible to make the display of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 and the notification time by sound output the same between the first mode and the second mode.

In addition, a specified emphasis effect (e.g., a light-emitting effect of the effect button emphasis effect) can be executed when a vibration effect of the effect button emphasis effect is being executed before and after the start of a special effect in the notification effect (e.g., a reach establishment effect, a SP reach development selection, a pseudo consecutive effect, etc.), and the execution time of this specified emphasis effect can be made different. Also, it is possible to make the display of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 and the notification time by the sound output the same before and after the start of a special effect in the notification effect.

In addition, a specified emphasis effect (for example, a light-emitting effect of the effect button emphasis effect) can be executed when a vibration effect of the effect button emphasis effect is being executed, and it is possible to differentiate the execution time of the specified emphasis effect from the display of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 or the notification time by sound output.

In addition, a specified emphasis effect (e.g., a light-emitting effect of the effect button emphasis effect) can be executed when a vibration effect of the effect button emphasis effect is being executed, and the execution time of the specified emphasis effect can be made different between the first mode (e.g., during normal play mode) and the second mode (e.g., during time-saving play mode). In addition, the display of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 and the notification time by sound output can be made the same between the first mode and the second mode.

It is also possible to make the execution time (e.g., operation time, light emission time, etc.) of the movable role highlighting effect (83, etc.) different before and after the start of a special effect in the notification effect (e.g., reach establishment effect, SP reach development selection, pseudo consecutive effect, etc.). It is also possible to make the display of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 (or right hit notification image 370/left hit notification image 371) and the notification time by sound output the same before and after the start of a special effect in the notification effect.

It is also possible to make the execution time of the movable object emphasis performance different from the display of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 or the notification time by sound output.

In addition, it is possible to make the execution time of an emphasis effect (e.g., an arrow display, an arrow action display, a light emitting effect, etc.) that emphasizes the left-hit notification image 371 different from the notification time by the display of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 or the sound output.
In addition, it is possible to make the execution time of an emphasis effect (e.g., an arrow display, an arrow action display, a light emitting effect, etc.) that emphasizes the right-hit notification image 370 different from the notification time by the display of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 or the sound output.

It is also possible to execute a first emphasis effect (e.g., a double number confirmation emphasis effect, a pattern confirmation suggestion emphasis effect, a jackpot notification color emphasis (rainbow emphasis), etc.) that emphasizes an effect that suggests or notifies a jackpot (e.g., a double number temporary stop, etc.), and it is also possible to execute a specific vibration effect (e.g., a specific vibration effect of the effect button emphasis effect) while an effect that suggests or notifies a jackpot (e.g., a double number temporary stop, etc.) is being executed. It is also possible to execute a second emphasis effect (e.g., an emphasis effect in which the effect button emphasis effect emits rainbow colors, etc.) while a specific vibration effect is being executed, and it is possible to vary the execution time of the first emphasis effect, the execution time of the second emphasis effect, and the display of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 and the notification time by the sound output.

In addition, after the start of a special effect (for example, a reach-established effect, a SP development effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, etc.), it is possible to display an image of a specified emphasis effect (Figures 57 to 66), and it is possible to control the image of this specified emphasis effect so that it covers the decorative pattern but does not cover the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361.

In addition, it is possible to control the lighting effects of emphasis effects (such as temporary stop emphasis effects) that emphasize the effect patterns so that they are applied to the decorative patterns and not to the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361.

In addition, it is possible to control the lighting effect for emphasizing the occurrence of a double number so that it is applied to the decorative pattern and not to the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361.

In addition, it is possible to control the light emitting effect for emphasizing the button image (such as FIG. 67(1)) that can be displayed before the button image is displayed so that it applies to the decorative pattern but not to the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361.

In addition, it is possible to control the light emission effect (such as FIG. 68 (3-1)) of the button image highlighting effect in response to the operation of the effect button 16 so that it applies to the decorative pattern and not to the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361.

In addition, it is possible to control the lighting effect of the pseudo consecutive highlighting performance (Figure 41, etc.) so that it applies to the decorative pattern and not to the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361.

It is also possible to execute emphasis effects (e.g. emphasis effects for the formation of a double number, emphasis effects suggesting that a pattern has been confirmed, emphasis effects for color accentuation (rainbow emphasis), etc.) that emphasize effects that suggest or notify a jackpot (e.g. a temporary stop of a double number, etc.), and it is possible to control the image of this emphasis effect (light emitting effect, etc.) so that it applies to the decorative pattern and not to the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361.

It is also possible to execute an emphasis effect (e.g., an arrow display, an arrow action display, a light-emitting effect, etc.) that emphasizes the right-hit notification image 370 (or the left-hit notification image 371), and it is possible to control the image of this emphasis effect (light-emitting effect, etc.) so that it applies to the decorative pattern but not to the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361.

In addition, in the notification performance, a predetermined performance (for example, an SP reach performance, etc.) can be executed, and in the predetermined performance, a decorative pattern with a losing outcome can be displayed, followed by a special image (for example, an eye-catching image that is displayed on the entire screen (or part of the screen) to draw the eye and change the mood). While this special image is displayed, certain emphasis performances that emphasize the decorative pattern (for example, a temporary stop emphasis performance, a swing emphasis performance, etc.) are restricted, but the display of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 and notifications by sound output can be executed.

In addition, in a specific change effect (e.g., a change due to pending consumption of the second special pattern lottery while the result is being displayed) in the second mode (e.g., during a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first mode (e.g., during a normal game state), the change effect of the decorative pattern is restricted and specific emphasis effects (e.g., a change start emphasis effect, a temporary stop emphasis effect, etc.) are restricted, but the display of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 and notifications by sound output can be executed.

In addition, a jackpot notification color emphasis (rainbow emphasis) effect can be executed during the execution of a specific movable role emphasis effect that suggests or notifies the player that a jackpot has been hit. When the jackpot notification color emphasis effect is being executed (displayed), the display of the decorative pattern that is easily visible is restricted, but the display of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 and notification by sound output can be executed.

In addition, when the special symbol stops changing, it is possible to limit the decorative symbol emphasis effect (e.g., temporary stop emphasis effect, swing emphasis effect, etc.) and the display of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 and the notification by sound output in the notification effect.

In addition, when the special symbol stops fluctuating, it is possible to limit the decorative symbol emphasis effect (for example, temporary stop emphasis effect, swing emphasis effect, etc.) in the notification effect without limiting the display of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 or the notification by sound output.

In addition, when a specific emphasis effect (for example, jackpot notification color emphasis (rainbow emphasis), etc.) is being performed, if the cross key 18 is operated, it is possible to display the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 or to notify by sound output, and if the rear key 170 is operated, it is possible not to execute at least some of the above notifications.

In addition, it is possible to change the display of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 and the notification by sound output when waiting for customers and when a specified emphasis effect (for example, a jackpot notification color emphasis (rainbow emphasis) effect) is being performed in the notification effect.

In addition, if the cross key 18 is operated while a specific emphasis effect (FIGS. 57 to 66) is being performed, it is possible to display the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 and to notify by sound output. On the other hand, while waiting for customers, it is possible to make the manner in which the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 is displayed and the manner in which the sound output is notified differently depending on whether the cross key 18 is operated or the back key 170 is operated.

In addition, a certain emphasis effect (Figs. 57 to 66) reduces the visibility of the decorative pattern but does not reduce the visibility of the volume gauge 360, etc., and if the cross key 18 is operated while the volume gauge 360, etc. is displayed, a notification sound is output and the presentation effect (volume and light intensity) can be adjusted. In addition, if the back key 170 is operated while the volume gauge 360, etc. is displayed, the presentation effect (volume and light intensity) can be adjusted without outputting a notification sound.

In addition, it is possible to make the sound effects of a specified emphasis performance (Figures 57 to 66) different between the first and second modes, and it is possible to make the notification sounds output for specific notifications (for example, notifications for right-hit, left-hit, notifications displaying a volume gauge, etc.) common between the first and second modes.

In addition, while the display mode of the temporary stop emphasis effect can be different between the first decorative pattern (e.g., the left decorative pattern) and the second decorative pattern (e.g., the right decorative pattern), it is possible to make the sound effects of the temporary stop emphasis effect the same. Also, when the first decorative pattern temporarily stops and when the second decorative pattern temporarily stops, it is possible to make the notification sound output at the time of a specific notification (e.g., a right hit notification, a left hit notification, a notification displaying a volume gauge, etc.) the same.

In addition, the sound effect of the temporary stop emphasis performance is the same for the first decorative pattern (e.g., the decorative "1" pattern) and the second decorative pattern (e.g., the decorative "2" pattern), but it is possible to make the emphasis sound different for the first decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern (e.g., the decorative "7" pattern). On the other hand, when any of the first, second, and third decorative patterns stops, it is possible to make the notification sound output at the time of a specific notification (e.g., a right hit notification, a left hit notification, a notification that displays a volume gauge, etc.) the same.

In addition, while the display modes of the first temporary stop emphasis performance of the first decorative pattern (e.g., the left and right decorative patterns) and the second temporary stop emphasis performance of the second decorative pattern (e.g., the middle decorative pattern) are different (e.g., character movements, light-emitting effects, etc.), it is possible for the sound effects to be the same. Also, it is possible for the notification sounds output during specific notifications (e.g., right hit notification, left hit notification, notifications displaying a volume gauge, etc.) to be the same during the execution of the first temporary stop emphasis performance and the execution of the second temporary stop emphasis performance.

It is also possible to have different presentation styles for the reach-teasing emphasis presentation that creates the expectation of a temporary stop of the first decorative symbol (e.g., the decorative symbol "4") and the reach-teasing emphasis presentation that creates the expectation of a temporary stop of the second decorative symbol (e.g., the decorative symbol "7"). It is also possible to have the same notification sound output at the time of a specific notification (e.g., a right-hit notification, a left-hit notification, a notification that displays a volume gauge, etc.) during the execution of the reach-teasing emphasis presentation that creates the expectation of a temporary stop of the first decorative symbol and during the execution of the reach-teasing emphasis presentation that creates the expectation of a temporary stop of the second decorative symbol.

It is also possible to have different presentation styles for the reach-achievement highlighting presentation when a reach is achieved with a first decorative symbol (e.g., the decorative symbol "4") and the reach-achievement highlighting presentation when a reach is achieved with a second decorative symbol (e.g., the decorative symbol "7"). It is also possible to have the same notification sound output for a specific notification (e.g., a right-hit notification, a left-hit notification, a notification displaying a volume gauge, etc.) when a reach is achieved with the first decorative symbol and when a reach is achieved with the second decorative symbol.

It is also possible to make the sound effects of the reach-established highlighting effect different when executing the first reach-established highlighting effect (e.g., a reach-established highlighting effect including a blue light-emitting effect) and when executing the second reach-established highlighting effect (e.g., a reach-established highlighting effect including a red light-emitting effect). It is also possible to make the notification sound output at the time of a specific notification (e.g., a right-hit notification, a left-hit notification, a notification displaying a volume gauge, etc.) the same when executing the first reach-established highlighting effect and when executing the second reach-established highlighting effect.

In addition, the first jackpot stop prompting emphasis effect, which emphasizes the center decorative pattern that is a repeat (e.g., the center decorative pattern that is a jackpot), and the second jackpot stop prompting emphasis effect, which emphasizes the center decorative pattern that is not a repeat (e.g., the center decorative pattern that is a miss), can be executed simultaneously (or alternately), and it is possible to make the sound effects of the jackpot stop prompting emphasis effect different between the first jackpot stop prompting emphasis effect and the second jackpot stop prompting emphasis effect. Also, it is possible to make the notification sound output at the time of a specific notification (e.g., a right hit notification, a left hit notification, a notification that displays a volume gauge, etc.) the same when the first jackpot stop prompting emphasis effect is being performed and when the second jackpot stop prompting emphasis effect is being performed.

It is also possible to execute a first doublet highlighting effect in which a first decorative symbol (e.g., a "4" decorative symbol) produces a doublet, and a second doublet highlighting effect in which a second decorative symbol (e.g., a "7" decorative symbol) produces a doublet, and it is possible to make the sound effects of the first doublet highlighting effect and the second doublet highlighting effect different. It is also possible to make the notification sound output at the time of a specific notification (e.g., a right-hit notification, a left-hit notification, a notification that displays a volume gauge, etc.) the same when the first doublet highlighting effect is being performed and when the second doublet highlighting effect is being performed.

In addition, while it is possible to have different sound effects for emphasizing the occurrence of a double number between the first and second modes, it is possible to have the same notification sound output for certain notifications (for example, notifications for right-hit, left-hit, notifications that display a volume gauge, etc.).

In addition, it is possible to have different presentation styles for reach establishment emphasis effects and SP development emphasis effects, and it is possible to have the same notification sound output for specific notifications (for example, notifications for right hits, left hits, notifications that display a volume gauge, etc.) when a reach establishment emphasis effect is being executed and when a SP development emphasis effect is being executed.

In addition, while the manner in which the movable role emphasis performance is performed differs between when the movable role emphasis performance is performed before a specific performance (e.g., a reach completion performance, a SP development performance, etc.) and when the movable role emphasis performance is performed after a specific performance, it is possible to make the notification sound output at the time of a specific notification (e.g., a right hit notification, a left hit notification, a notification that displays a volume gauge, etc.) the same. Note that in each embodiment, the execution time of the sound output may also be taken into consideration when deciding whether or not the sound output of sound effects, notification sounds, etc. is common.

In addition, while it is possible to have different sound effects for the movable part emphasis effect (and the jackpot notification color emphasis (rainbow emphasis) effect displayed behind the movable part 73 that has descended to the center of the screen 70, etc.) between the first and second modes, it is possible to have the same notification sound output for certain notifications (for example, right-hit notification, left-hit notification, notifications that display a volume gauge, etc.).

In addition, the predetermined emphasis effects (e.g., reach-achievement emphasis effects, chance eye emphasis effects, etc.) that emphasize the expected effects (e.g., reach-achievement emphasis effects, chance eye emphasis effects, etc.) that raise the expectation of a jackpot can be classified into a first mode (e.g., a red light-emitting effect mode) and a second mode (e.g., a gold light-emitting effect mode), and it is possible to make the sound effects of the predetermined emphasis effects different between the first mode and the second mode. In addition, it is possible to make the notification sound output at the time of a specific notification (e.g., a right-hit notification, a left-hit notification, a notification that displays a volume gauge, etc.) the same when the predetermined emphasis effect is performed in the first mode and when the predetermined emphasis effect is performed in the second mode.

In addition, in the hold change presentation, it is possible to make the sound effect of the hold change emphasis presentation different when the hold icon (including the hold icon on stage ST0; Figures 24, 25, etc.) is displayed in a first mode (e.g., blue) and when it is displayed in a second mode (e.g., red), while it is possible to make the notification sound output for certain notifications (e.g., right hit notification, left hit notification, notification displaying a volume gauge, etc.) the same.

In addition, while it is possible to make the sound effects of the button image emphasis performance (such as FIG. 67) different between the first and second modes, it is possible to make the notification sound output for a specific notification (for example, a right hit notification, a left hit notification, a notification that displays a volume gauge, etc.) the same. Note that this sound effect is, for example, a sound effect output when the light-emitting effect 350 is displayed just before the button image 351 is displayed (for example, a "beep" or "ping"), or a sound effect output while the button image 351 is displayed.

In addition, in the button image emphasis performance (Figure 67, etc.), it is possible to make the sound effects of the button image emphasis performance different when performing the first mode (e.g., a mode in which the light-emitting effect 350 is displayed immediately before the button image 351 is displayed) and when performing the second mode (e.g., a mode in which the button image 351 is gradually and clearly displayed from the display of the light-emitting effect 350), while it is possible to make the notification sound output at the time of a specific notification (e.g., a right-hit notification, a left-hit notification, a notification that displays a volume gauge, etc.). Note that the sound effects of the button image emphasis performance may be different in the same presentation mode, or the sound effects of the button image emphasis performance may be different for each presentation mode.

In addition, while it is possible to make the sound effect of the button image emphasis performance different when performing a first button image emphasis performance (for example, a button image emphasis performance for a single press operation response performance; FIG. 67) and when performing a second button image emphasis performance (for example, a button image emphasis performance for a long press operation response performance; FIG. 69), it is possible to make the notification sound output for a specific notification (for example, a right hit notification, a left hit notification, a notification that displays a volume gauge, etc.) the same. Note that the way the button image disappears may differ depending on the type of operation response performance (for example, a single press, repeated hits, long press), and the behavior of the button image (the behavior of the button image in the button image emphasis performance) may also differ.

In addition, while it is possible to have different sound effects for button image emphasis effects before and after the execution of special effects (e.g., reach establishment effects, SP development effects, pseudo consecutive effects, etc.), it is possible to have the same notification sound output for specific notifications (e.g., right-hit notifications, left-hit notifications, notifications that display a volume gauge, etc.).

Furthermore, as an operation response effect (e.g., FIG. 67 (4) etc.) that can be executed in response to the operation of the effect button 16 during the operation valid period, a predetermined operation response effect (e.g., a cut-in preview effect, etc.; FIG. 38 (5) etc.) can be executed, and a predetermined emphasis effect that emphasizes a predetermined operation response effect (e.g., a cut-in emphasis effect, etc.; FIG. 38 (5) etc.) can be executed. And, while it is possible to make the sound effect of the predetermined emphasis effect different between the first predetermined emphasis effect and the second predetermined emphasis effect, it is possible to make the notification sound output at the time of a specific notification (e.g., a right hit notification, a left hit notification, a notification that displays a volume gauge, etc.) the same when performing the first predetermined emphasis effect and when performing the second predetermined emphasis effect.

In addition, while it is possible to make the output time (period during which the sound is played) of the sound effects of a specified emphasis performance (Figures 57 to 66) different between the first and second modes, it is possible to make the output time (period during which the sound is played) of the notification sounds that are output for specific notifications (for example, notifications of right hits, notifications of left hits, notifications that display a volume gauge, etc.) the same.

In addition, while it is possible to make the output time (period during which the sound is played) of the sound effect of the emphasis effect different between the first emphasis effect (e.g., a reach establishment emphasis effect, SP development effect, pseudo consecutive effect, etc.) that is executed before the execution of a special effect and the first emphasis effect that is executed after the execution of a special effect, it is possible to make the output time (period during which the sound is played) of the notification sound that is output at the time of a specific notification (e.g., a right hit notification, a left hit notification, a notification that displays a volume gauge, etc.) the same when the first emphasis effect is being executed and when the second emphasis effect is being executed.

In addition, while it is possible to make the output time (period during which the sound is played) of the sound effects of the specified emphasis effects (e.g., emphasis effects when the number of repeated numbers is reached, emphasis effects indicating that the number of repeated numbers has been reached, emphasis effects indicating that the number of repeated numbers has been reached, and color emphasis effects (rainbow emphasis effects) that indicate a jackpot, etc.) that emphasize decorative patterns (double numbers) that suggest or notify a jackpot can be different between the first and second modes, it is possible to make the output time (period during which the sound is played) of the notification sounds that are output at the time of specific notifications (e.g., notifications for right-hit notifications, left-hit notifications, notifications that display a volume gauge, etc.) the same.

In addition, while it is possible to make the output time (period during which the sound is played) of the sound effect of the button image emphasis performance different between the first mode and the second mode, it is possible to make the output time (period during which the sound is played) of the notification sound output at the time of a specific notification (for example, a right hit notification, a left hit notification, a notification that displays a volume gauge, etc.) the same.

In addition, while it is possible to make the output time (period during which the sound is being played) of the sound effect of the movable part emphasis performance (or the jackpot notification color emphasis (rainbow emphasis) performance that is executed behind the movable part 73 that has descended to the center of the screen 70 or the like and can emphasize the movable part 73) different between the first mode and the second mode, it is possible to make the output time (period during which the sound is being played) of the notification sound that is output at the time of a specific notification (for example, a right hit notification, a left hit notification, a notification that displays a volume gauge, etc.) the same.

In addition, the predetermined emphasis effects (e.g., reach-achievement emphasis effects, chance eye emphasis effects, etc.) that emphasize the expected effects (e.g., reach-achievement emphasis effects, chance eye emphasis effects, etc.) that anticipate a jackpot can be classified into a first mode (e.g., a red light-emitting effect mode) and a second mode (e.g., a gold light-emitting effect mode). It is possible to make the output time (the period during which the sound is played) of the sound effect of the predetermined emphasis effect different between the first mode and the second mode, while it is possible to make the notification sound output at the time of a specific notification (e.g., a right-hit notification, a left-hit notification, a notification that displays a volume gauge, etc.) the same when the predetermined emphasis effect is performed in the first mode and when the predetermined emphasis effect is performed in the second mode.

In addition, in the hold change performance, it is possible to make the output time (period during which the sound is played) of a specified emphasis performance sound effect different when the hold icon (including the hold icon on stage ST0; Figures 24, 25, etc.) is displayed in a first state (e.g., blue) from when it is displayed in a second state (e.g., red), while it is possible to make the notification sound output at the time of a specific notification (e.g., right hit notification, left hit notification, notification displaying a volume gauge, etc.) the same.

In addition, while it is possible to have different predetermined sounds (e.g., background music, etc.) that can be continuously output during the execution of a notification effect (variable effect) before and after the execution of a predetermined emphasis effect (Figures 58 to 66), it is possible to have the same notification sound output for specific notifications (e.g., right-hit notification, left-hit notification, notification that displays a volume gauge, etc.). Note that the predetermined sound may be switched before, during, or after the execution of a predetermined emphasis effect, and there may also be a predetermined sound dedicated to the predetermined emphasis effect.

In addition, it is possible to have the same predetermined sound (e.g., background music, etc.) that can be continuously output during the notification effect (variable effect) before and after the execution of the first emphasis effect (e.g., reach establishment emphasis effect, etc.), and to have a different predetermined sound before and after the execution of the second emphasis effect (e.g., SP development emphasis effect, etc.), which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the first emphasis effect. Also, it is possible to have the same notification sound output at the time of a specific notification (e.g., right hit notification, left hit notification, notification displaying a volume gauge, etc.) before and after the execution of the first emphasis effect, and to have the same notification sound before and after the execution of the second emphasis effect.

In addition, it is possible to give priority to specific notifications (e.g., notifications for right-hit, left-hit, notifications that display a volume gauge, etc.) over predetermined emphasis effects that emphasize decorative patterns (double numbers) that suggest or notify a jackpot (e.g., emphasis effects for double numbers, emphasis effects that suggest a confirmed pattern, color emphasis effects (rainbow emphasis) for jackpot notification, etc.).

In addition, it is possible to lengthen the execution time of specific notifications (e.g., notifications that display a right-hit notification, a left-hit notification, a volume gauge, etc.) compared to predetermined emphasis effects that emphasize decorative patterns (double numbers) that suggest or notify a jackpot (e.g., double number confirmation emphasis effects, pattern confirmation suggestion emphasis effects, jackpot notification color emphasis (rainbow emphasis), etc.).

In addition, when a specific notification (e.g., a notification that displays a right-hand hit notification, a left-hand hit notification, a volume gauge, etc.) is executed during the execution of a specified emphasis effect (e.g., a double-number emphasis effect, a pattern confirmation suggestion emphasis effect, a jackpot notification color emphasis (rainbow emphasis) effect, etc.) that emphasizes a decorative pattern (double numbers) that suggests or indicates a jackpot, at least a part of the decorative pattern and the specified emphasis effect may become difficult or impossible to see due to the image of the specific notification.

In addition, while the display of a specific notification (e.g., a left hit notification) continues for a predetermined time, it can be terminated if a special symbol is displayed stationary even before the predetermined time has elapsed (e.g., when a jackpot is hit and jackpot play begins). Similarly, the notification sound of the specific notification can also be terminated (although it may continue without being terminated).

In addition, when a specific notification (for example, a notification that displays a right-hit notification, a left-hit notification, a volume gauge, etc.) and an effect by the movable device 73 are executed simultaneously, it is possible to lower the movable device 73 to the center of the screen 70 while giving priority to the specific notification over the emphasis effect associated with the effect by the movable device 73 (for example, a jackpot notification English description emphasis effect (rainbow emphasis) displayed behind the movable device 73 as it descends to the center of the screen 70).

In addition, after a predetermined emphasis effect (e.g., a double-digit highlight effect, a confirmed-digit highlight effect, a jackpot notification color highlight (rainbow highlight) effect, etc.) that highlights a decorative pattern (double numbers) that suggests or notifies a jackpot is executed, a specific notification (e.g., a right-hit notification) can be executed, and the predetermined notification (e.g., a left-hit notification) can continue for a first time, and the specific notification can continue for a second time that is longer than the first time.

In addition, during the execution of a predetermined emphasis effect (e.g., a doublet occurrence emphasis effect, a confirmed pattern emphasis effect, a jackpot announcement color emphasis (rainbow emphasis) effect, etc.) that emphasizes a decorative pattern (doublet number) that suggests or notifies a jackpot, a specific announcement (e.g., a left hit announcement) can be executed when a right hit operation that shoots the game ball into the right-side game area is performed, and after the execution of the predetermined emphasis effect, it is possible not to execute the specific announcement when a right hit operation is performed.

In addition, after a predetermined emphasis effect (e.g., emphasis effect when a repeat number is established, emphasis effect when a pattern is confirmed, emphasis effect when a jackpot is announced color (rainbow emphasis effect), etc.) that emphasizes a decorative pattern (double number) that suggests or notifies a jackpot is executed, a first specific notification (e.g., right-hit notification) can be executed in conjunction with the start of a jackpot game. In addition, a second specific notification (e.g., left-hit notification) can be executed at a fixed first position on the screen 70 (e.g., the center of the screen 70), and the first specific notification can be executed at a second position on the screen 70 (e.g., the top left of the screen 70) and then at a third position (e.g., the top right of the screen 70). In addition, the first specific notification can be displayed at a position according to the game scene (scene of the presentation).

In addition, in the time-saving game mode, if a specific emphasis effect (e.g., a double-digit emphasis effect, a temporary stop emphasis effect, etc.) is executed during a specific notification (e.g., a right-hit notification), the specific notification (right-hit notification) can overlap with part of the specific emphasis effect and be displayed with priority over part of the specific emphasis effect.

In addition, a first specific notification (e.g., a right-hit notification) can be executed in the time-saving game state, and when the time-saving game state transitions to the normal game state, a second specific notification (e.g., a left-hit notification) can be executed. In addition, in the normal game state, the second specific notification can be displayed in priority over the decorative pattern and the temporary stop highlighting effect.

In addition, if a specific notification (e.g., a left hit notification) is made when transitioning from a time-saving play state to a normal play state, the specific notification can be made in a first manner (e.g., a medium-sized notification manner), and if a right hit is detected in the normal play state, the specific notification can be made in the first manner and then in a second manner (e.g., a large-sized notification manner).

In addition, it is possible to prioritize specific notifications (for example, notifications that display a right-hit notification, a left-hit notification, a volume gauge, etc.) over the re-selection emphasis effect.

In addition, it is possible to give priority to specific notifications (e.g. notifications that display a right-hit notification, a left-hit notification, a volume gauge, etc.) over highlighting effects (e.g., special lighting effects, etc.) that emphasize the full-rotation reach effect, in which decorative patterns are displayed in a changing manner based on a combination of patterns (double numbers) that indicate a jackpot.

In addition, in special effects (e.g., reach success effects, SP reach effects, etc.), while a specific image (e.g., an eye-catching image that is displayed on the entire screen (or part of the screen) to draw the eye and change the mood) that can be displayed after a decorative pattern (losing eye) indicating a loss is displayed, the output of sound effects for a specific emphasis effect (e.g., temporary stop emphasis effect, etc.) can be restricted, while notification sounds for specific notifications (e.g., notifications that display a right hit notification, left hit notification, volume gauge, etc.) can be output.

In addition, when a specific notification (e.g., a right-hit notification) is made during the execution of a specific emphasis effect (e.g., a cut-in notice effect, a reach-established emphasis effect, etc.) that emphasizes an effect that anticipates a jackpot (e.g., a cut-in notice effect, a reach-established emphasis effect, etc.), when the cross key 18 is operated, the sound effect (performance effect) of the specific emphasis effect can be adjusted and the notification sound of the specific notification can be adjusted (or the notification sound of the specific notification can not be adjusted).

In addition, when the cross key 18 is operated during the execution of a performance that anticipates a big win (for example, a cut-in preview performance, a reach completion performance, etc.) or a predetermined emphasis performance that emphasizes a decorative pattern (for example, a cut-in emphasis performance, a reach completion emphasis performance, a reach completion emphasis performance, a temporary stop emphasis performance, etc.), the sound effect (performance effect) of the predetermined emphasis performance can be adjusted and a specific notification (output of an operation sound for changing the volume) can be made, and when the back key 170 is operated, the sound effect (performance effect) of the predetermined emphasis performance can be adjusted without making a specific notification (output of an operation sound for changing the volume). Note that, in response to the operation of the back key 170, the display of the volume gauge 360 and the light quantity gauge 361 is not started, but the scales of the volume gauge 360 and the light quantity gauge 361 that are already displayed may be increased or decreased.

In addition, depending on the operation of the rear key 170 or the rear key 170, the sound effect (performance effect) of a predetermined emphasis performance (FIGS. 57 to 66) can be changed from a first state (e.g., volume 1 state) to a second state (e.g., volume 2 state), and if the power is turned off and then on while the sound effect of the predetermined emphasis performance is set to the second state in the time-saving play mode, the time-saving play mode is maintained, but the sound effect of the predetermined emphasis performance can be returned to the first state. Note that in this case, the sound effect of the predetermined emphasis performance may be maintained in the second state.

[Modifications, etc.]
In addition, in the swing emphasis performance (FIG. 30), the decorative pattern may not swing. In this case, the movement (movement) of the light-emitting effect 304 can make the decorative pattern look as if it is swinging. In addition, the swing action of the decorative pattern (FIG. 30) is not limited to the rotation of the number 701 of the decorative pattern, but may include, for example, a swinging position change without changing the shape of the entire decorative pattern, or at least one of the character 702, the frame 700, and the number 701 moving. In addition, the swing emphasis performance is not affected by the character action of the temporary stop emphasis performance and the change start emphasis performance, but may be affected by the light-emitting effect. In addition, the swing emphasis performance may be executed on at least one of the decorative patterns on the left, right, and center. In addition, the swing emphasis performance may include a unique sound effect.

In addition, a notice highlighting at the start of a fluctuation (see FIG. 59) may be executed. The notice highlighting at the start of a fluctuation is an effect that emphasizes a decorative pattern at the start of a notification effect, for example, like a chance eye emphasis effect (FIG. 36), and is an emphasis effect that raises expectations of a big win in the notification effect being executed. As the notice highlighting at the start of a fluctuation is executed at the start of a fluctuation, it can also be considered a type of notice highlighting effect at the start of a fluctuation.

In addition, emphasis effects that emphasize decorative patterns (for example, change start emphasis effects, temporary stop emphasis effects, swing emphasis effects, etc.) can change the size of the emphasis area (proportion of the decorative pattern, etc.) by enlarging/reducing or rotating (rotating) the decorative pattern.

In addition, the temporary stop highlighting effect and the change start highlighting effect may not be performed or may be performed in a smaller highlight area if the decorative patterns on the left, right, and center temporarily stop at the same time.

In addition, the change start emphasis effect may include emphasis by enlarging/reducing or rotating (rotating) the decorative pattern, similar to the temporary stop emphasis effect.

In addition, there may be a change pattern in which the central decorative pattern that last starts to change (or temporarily stops) is smaller (or larger) than the decorative patterns on the left and right, and in this case, the change start emphasis effect (or temporary stop emphasis effect) may be such that the proportion of the emphasis area of the central decorative pattern that last starts to change (or temporarily stops) in the decorative pattern is smaller (or larger) than the proportion of the emphasis area of the decorative patterns on the left and right.

In addition, the proportion of the decorative pattern that is taken up by the emphasis area of the decorative pattern emphasis effect (for example, temporary stop emphasis effect, fluctuation start emphasis effect) may be varied depending on the game state and the presentation mode (presentation stage). In addition, at the same time as the display of light-emitting effects such as fluctuation start emphasis effect, temporary stop emphasis effect, reach success emphasis effect, and double number success emphasis effect, a swing emphasis effect can be executed below this light-emitting effect.

In addition, the mode of the button image highlighting effect (for example, the frequency or speed of the rapid-fire action display) may be different before and after the start of a special effect in the notification effect (for example, a reach-established effect, an SP development effect, etc.).

The presentation mode of each of the emphasis effects (FIGS. 57 to 66) may be different before and after the start of a special effect (e.g., a reach achievement effect, an SP development effect, etc.) in the notification effect. The presentation mode of each of the emphasis effects (FIGS. 57 to 66) may be different depending on the presentation mode.

A predetermined emphasis effect may be executed when at least a part (e.g., the emphasis portion 383) of the identification image 380 (FIG. 89) that identifies the presentation mode in association with a change in presentation mode (presentation stage) is changed. The predetermined emphasis effect may include a first predetermined emphasis effect (e.g., a predetermined emphasis effect associated with a change in presentation mode) and a second predetermined emphasis effect (e.g., a predetermined emphasis effect associated with the execution of a zone presentation). In that case, the notification effect in which the second predetermined emphasis effect (e.g., a predetermined emphasis effect displaying a red light emitting effect) is executed may have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the notification effect in which the first predetermined emphasis effect (e.g., a predetermined emphasis effect displaying a blue light emitting effect) is executed.

In addition, the display mode of the highlighting effect (e.g., temporary stop highlighting effect) for the decorative pattern of the number character mode (Figure 23) may be different between the first and second presentation stages in the normal game state (or the time-saving game state), but the display mode of the highlighting effect for the decorative pattern of the number mode may not be different.

In addition, the display mode of the highlighting effects (e.g., temporary stop highlighting effects) for the decorative symbols on the left and right after a reach is achieved may differ between the first and second presentation stages in the normal game state (or time-saving game state), but the display of the reach achievement highlighting effects may not differ.

In addition, the manner in which the highlighting effect of the intermediate decorative symbols (for example, the temporary stop highlighting effect) occurs after the establishment of a reach is different between the first and second presentation stages in the normal game state (or the time-saving game state), but the manner in which the pseudo consecutive highlighting symbols occur may be the same.

In addition, at least a portion of the temporary stop emphasis effects of the left and right decorative symbols may be different between the first and second performance stages in the normal game state (or the time-saving game state).

In addition, at least a portion of the temporary stop emphasis effects may be different for decorative symbols with different numbers in a particular performance stage.

The execution rate of the reach teasing effect (and the reach teasing emphasis effect) may also be varied depending on the reach number (for example, the reach number of the "2" symbol or the reach number of the "7" symbol).

In addition, the number of types of specified emphasis effects (for example, temporary stop emphasis effects, change start emphasis effects, etc.) may be different between the left and right decorative patterns and the center decorative pattern.

In addition, in a particular performance stage, at least some of the specified emphasis performances (for example, temporary stop emphasis performances, double number establishment emphasis performances, etc.) may differ depending on whether the odd number pattern is a double number or an even number pattern is a double number.

In addition, the button highlighting effect before (or after) the button image is displayed can be the same in the first half of the notification effect (for example, before a reach is achieved, before the SP reach effect starts, etc.) and the second half, or it can be different.

In addition, the button highlighting effects before (or after) the button images are displayed can be the same for the first and second presentation stages in the normal game mode (or time-saving game mode), or they can be different.

Also, the text image (e.g., "Press!") of the button image 351 (FIG. 67(2)) and the gauge indicating the remaining time of the effective operation period may be considered as a type of button image emphasis effect. In this case, at least one of the first part (e.g., the text image "Press!") and the second part (e.g., the button image pressing action display) of the button image emphasis effect may be common between the first half of the notification effect (e.g., before a reach is established, before a SP reach effect starts, etc.) and the second half.
In addition, at least one of the first part (e.g., the text image "Press!") and the second part (e.g., the display of the button image pressing action) of the button image emphasis effect may be common between the first and second presentation stages in the normal game play state (or the time-saving game play state).
Furthermore, the motion display of the button image for the button image highlighting effect (for example, a continuous tap motion display) may have a plurality of motion cycles.
In addition, at least one of the execution time of the first part of the button image emphasis effect (e.g., the text image ``Press!'') and the execution time of the second part of the button image emphasis effect (e.g., the display of the button image pressing action) may be different before and after the start of a special effect (e.g., a reach establishment effect, an SP development effect, etc.).
In addition, before the start of a special effect (e.g., a reach establishment effect, an SP development effect, etc.), the execution time of a first part of the button image emphasis effect (e.g., the text image ``Press!'') may be made different from the execution time of a second part of the button image emphasis effect (e.g., the display of the button image pressing action).
In addition, after the start of a special effect (e.g., a reach establishment effect, an SP development effect, etc.), the execution time of a first part of the button image emphasis effect (e.g., the text image ``Press!'') may be made different from the execution time of a second part of the button image emphasis effect (e.g., the display of the button image pressing action).
In addition, at least one of the execution time of the first part of the button image emphasis effect (e.g., the text image "Press!") and the execution time of the second part of the button image emphasis effect (e.g., the display of the button image pressing action) may be made different between the normal game state and the time-saving game state.
In addition, in the normal game state (or the time-saving game state), at least one of the execution time of the first part of the button image emphasis effect (e.g., the text image "Press!") and the execution time of the second part of the button image emphasis effect (e.g., the display of the button image pressing action) may be made different.

In addition, the button image emphasis effect of the first operation response effect (e.g., a single press) may have a first part (e.g., a text image "Press!") and a second part (e.g., a pressing action display of the button image), and the button image emphasis effect of the second operation response effect (e.g., repeated press/long press) may have a third part (e.g., a text image "Press!") and a fourth part (e.g., a pressing action display of the button image). At least two of the aspects of the first part to the fourth part may be different. At least two of the execution times of the effects of the first part to the fourth part may be different.

In addition, the emphasis effect (for example, the type of button image emphasis effect) executed when the effect button 16 is operated may differ depending on whether or not a jackpot has been reached.
In addition, the second presentation button emphasis effect (e.g., illumination of the presentation button 16) when the first presentation button emphasis effect (e.g., vibration of the presentation button 16) is executed may be the same or different between the first presentation stage and the second presentation stage in the same game state (or different game states).
In addition, depending on the game status, the second effect button emphasis effect (e.g., illumination of effect button 16) when the first effect button emphasis effect (e.g., vibration of effect button 16) is executed may be the same or different.
In addition, when a first effect button emphasis effect (e.g., vibration of effect button 16) and a second effect button emphasis effect (e.g., illumination of effect button 16) are executed, the execution time of the first effect button emphasis effect and the execution time of the second effect button emphasis effect may be the same or different.
In addition, the ratio of the execution time of the second effect button emphasis effect (e.g., the illumination of the effect button 16) to the execution time of the first effect button emphasis effect (e.g., the vibration of the effect button 16) may be different before and after the start of a special effect (e.g., a reach effect, a SP development effect, etc.).
In addition, the ratio of the execution time of the second effect button emphasis effect (e.g., illumination of the effect button 16) to the execution time of the first effect button emphasis effect (e.g., vibration of the effect button 16) may be varied depending on the game status.

In addition, the first and second presentation stages in the same game state may have the same or different emphasis effects (e.g., a double-digit occurrence emphasis effect, a jackpot announcement color emphasis (rainbow emphasis) effect, etc.) for effects that notify of a jackpot (e.g., a double-digit occurrence emphasis effect) that notify of a jackpot.
In addition, the first part of the movable part highlighting performance (e.g., the operation of the movable part 73, the light emission of the movable part 73 while it is not moving) may be the same or different before and after the start of a special performance (e.g., a reach establishment performance, a SP development performance, etc.), and the second part of the movable part highlighting performance (e.g., the light emission of the movable part 73, the light emission of the movable part 73 while it is moving) may be the same or different.
In addition, at least one of the execution time of the first part and the execution time of the second part may be made different before and after the start of a special effect (for example, a reach establishment effect, a SP development effect, etc.).
In addition, before (or after) the start of a special effect (e.g., a reach establishment effect, an SP development effect, etc.), the execution time of the first part and the execution time of the second part may be different or may be the same.
In addition, at least one of the execution time of the first portion and the execution time of the second portion may be made different depending on the game state or the presentation stage.
Furthermore, in the same game state or presentation stage, the execution time of the first portion and the execution time of the second portion may be different or may be the same.

In addition, depending on the execution of each emphasis effect (FIGS. 57 to 66), a lamp (such as the board lamp 10a or the frame lamp 10) may be illuminated (a specific illumination corresponding to the emphasis effect being executed), which may be considered a type of emphasis effect. In this case, a specific lamp illumination corresponding to the emphasis effect being executed may be performed.

In addition, even if the button highlighting image presentation is the same color (white button image, red button image, etc.) between the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode, the manner of the button image highlighting presentation before the button image is displayed may be different.
In addition, in the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode, for the button image emphasis presentation during the effective operation period, the appearance of the first part of the button image emphasis presentation (e.g., the color of the button image) is the same, but the appearance of the first part of the button image emphasis presentation (e.g., the operation appearance of the characters or the button image) may be different.

In addition, the eye-catching image that is displayed after the SP reach performance is executed and the losing numbers are stopped, or when the performance stage is changed, may be displayed in front of the hold icon, but it does not have to be displayed in front of the volume gauge 360 or the light intensity gauge 361.
Further, the volume gauge 360 and the light quantity gauge 361 may be displayed in front of the decorative pattern, but may not be displayed in front of the special pattern 400 (Figure 56).
In addition, it is preferable that the left hit notification image 371 is displayed in front of the volume gauge 360 and the light quantity gauge 361.
Also, even if the volume is adjusted using the cross key 18, it is preferable that the warning sound for the left-handed hit notification is not adjusted.
In addition, it is preferable that the left hit notification image 371 is displayed in front of each emphasis effect (Figures 57 to 66).
In addition, the execution time of the left hit notification may be longer than the predetermined emphasis effect (FIGS. 57 to 66). In addition, the left hit notification may end once at the end of the notification effect (when the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped).

Also, after the SP reach performance (or SPSP reach performance) is executed, a losing number is displayed, and an eye-catching image is displayed, a temporary stop emphasis may be executed. On the other hand, when a revival winning performance is executed, after the SP reach performance (or SPSP reach performance) is executed, a losing number is displayed, and an eye-catching image is displayed, a temporary stop emphasis may be executed.
In addition, in a time-saving game state, the execution time (fluctuation time) of an announcement effect in which a predetermined emphasis effect on a decorative pattern (for example, a fluctuation start emphasis effect, a temporary stop emphasis effect, etc.) is limited (for example, an announcement effect that consumes remaining reserves) may be made shorter than that of an announcement effect in which a predetermined emphasis effect on a decorative pattern is executed (for example, a fluctuation start emphasis effect, a temporary stop emphasis effect, etc.).
In addition, when the performance of the movable part 73 that suggests or notifies a jackpot is being executed, the decorative patterns may be hidden by the movable part 73, limiting visibility of the decorative patterns, but it is preferable that at least a portion of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 is displayed so that it is visible to the player.
In addition, when the notification performance ends (when the decorative pattern determination stops), one of the display of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 and the notification sound (adjustment sound) may be limited, but the other may not be limited.
In addition, the volume gauge 360/light gauge 361 may be displayed in front of each emphasis effect (FIGS. 57 to 66).

Moreover, it is preferable that the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 be displayed in the same display mode regardless of the performance stage or game state.
In addition, it is preferable that the display time of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 is constant at any timing during the execution of the notification performance when the cross key 18 is operated once.
In addition, while waiting for customers, the display time of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 may be longer than when the notification performance is being performed.
In addition, the display mode of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 may be different when waiting for customers and when the notification performance is being executed, or may be the same.
In addition, when the light intensity is adjusted by operating the cross key 18 (displaying the light intensity gauge 361), the light intensity of the lamps (the lamps of the performance buttons 16, the lamps of the movable parts 73, the frame lamp 10, etc.) changes, but it is preferable that the light intensity of the main/sub image display sections 70, 71 does not change.
Furthermore, the operation sound for adjusting the volume and the operation sound for adjusting the light amount by operating the cross key 18 may be different or may be the same.
Also, the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 may overlap with a changing performance symbol, but may be controlled so as not to overlap with a performance symbol that has stopped being fixed.
In addition, when the notification effect is not being executed, it may be possible to execute an effect button emphasis effect or a movable part emphasis effect.
In addition, when the notification performance ends, one of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 and the adjustment sound may be limited.
In addition, the display time of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 is a specific time (e.g., 5 seconds) from the start of display in response to the operation of the cross key 18, but if the cross key 18 is operated while the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 is displayed, the gauge may be controlled so that it is displayed for a specific time from the time of this operation (e.g., 5 seconds from the last operation).

Furthermore, the number of display steps (total number of marks) of the volume gauge 360 and the number of volume steps when adjusting the volume using the rear key 170 may be different or the same.
Furthermore, a single step (scale) of the volume gauge 360 may be associated with a plurality of steps of the volume operation of the rear key 170 .
It is also preferable that an operation sound is output when the cross key 18 is operated to change the volume, and that no operation sound is output when the back key 170 is operated.
In addition, when the volume is adjusted by operating the rear key 170 while the notification performance is being performed, the volume changes, and at that time, the volume gauge 360 may or may not be displayed.

In addition, the volume of the notification sound for left-handed hits may be changeable by volume manipulation, or may be fixed and unchangeable.
In addition, the left hit notification may include a first left hit notification and a second left hit notification, and the notification time of the first left hit notification may be longer than that of the first left hit notification.
In addition, the first left-handed hit notification may be made by displaying the left-handed hit notification image 371 and outputting a notification sound, and the second left-handed hit notification may be further notified by lamps or the like.
Furthermore, the left hit notification image 371 may be displayed in front of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 or behind it.
Furthermore, the left hit notification image 371 may be displayed in the same manner or in different manners in the first and second performance stages.
In addition, emphasis effects (e.g., emphasis movements, light-emitting effects, emphasis sounds, etc.) are executed to emphasize the left hit notification image 371 and the left hit notification image 370, and both emphasis effects may be common to each other or at least some of them may be different.
In addition, when a right-hit notification is made, it may or may not be accompanied by an alarm sound, and when a left-hit notification is made, it may or may not be accompanied by an alarm sound.
In addition, the right hit notification image 370 may be displayed on the right side (upper right, etc.) of the screen 70, and the left hit notification image 371 may be displayed on the left side (upper left, etc.) of the screen 70.
In addition, the right hit notification image 370 and the left hit notification image 371 may differ in at least one of the display position and size.

In addition, lamps corresponding to left-hit notifications (or right-hit notifications) (for example, frame lamps, movable part lamps, effect button lamps, etc.) may or may not be illuminated.

The right-hit notification image 370 may or may not be displayed while the result is being displayed. Also, if a jackpot occurs with remaining reserved balls, a left-hit notification may or may not be executed before the jackpot occurs.

In addition, in the case of a jackpot notification display, if the display control unit 400 is unable to receive commands from the main control unit 100, a specified emphasis display (for example, an emphasis display when a double number is reached) may be executed, but the left-hit notification may not be executed.
In addition, in a notification effect in which a specific effect (for example, a pre-reading preview effect, a reach effect, etc.) is performed, if the effect control unit 400 is unable to receive commands from the main control unit 100, an emphasis effect associated with the specific effect (for example, a chance eye emphasis effect, a reach establishment emphasis effect, etc.) may be executed, but a left-hit notification may not be executed.

In addition, if the performance control unit 400 misses the notification performance start command from the main control unit 100, the change start emphasis performance and the first pre-determination performance (e.g., chance eye notice performance, etc.) cannot be executed, but the second pre-determination performance (e.g., hold change notice performance, etc.) may be controlled to be executable.

In addition, if the performance control unit 400 misses a notification performance stop command from the main control unit 100, the notification performance may be continued without terminating (i.e., the decorative pattern may be temporarily stopped without being displayed as a definite stop), and if the next notification performance start command is received in that state, the control may be configured to execute the notification performance according to the received notification performance start command.
In addition, if the performance control unit 400 misses the notification performance start command from the main control unit 100 and also misses the next notification performance start command, the change start emphasis performance will be executed as usual, but the performance of shifting (moving) the pending icon may be controlled to be in a different manner than usual (for example, as if the pending icon were discontinuously warped).
In addition, if the performance control unit 400 is unable to receive commands from the main control unit 100 during the execution of a notification performance in which a specific emphasis performance (for example, a repeat number emphasis performance, a reach emphasis performance, a chance number emphasis performance, etc.) is executed, the specific emphasis performance will be executed, but the oscillation period after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (and the execution period of the oscillation emphasis performance) may be controlled to be longer than when commands can be received normally.

In addition, lamp illumination (e.g., illumination of the lamp of the effect button, illumination of the lamp of the movable part, illumination of the frame lamp, etc.) corresponding to each emphasis effect (Figures 57 to 66) may be performed.

Furthermore, each feature of each of the emphasis effects described above may be replaced with a feature of another emphasis effect, or another feature of the emphasis effect may be added, thereby increasing interest, etc.

Although the features (configurations) of each embodiment and the variations have been described above, it goes without saying that these features may be combined to improve interest, etc. Furthermore, the features of each embodiment and the variations described above may be reversed to create the opposite features. For example, a configuration that executes a certain operation, etc. may be a configuration that does not execute this certain operation, etc. Furthermore, a configuration that does not execute a certain operation, etc. may be a configuration that executes this certain operation, etc.

Furthermore, the shape, number, installation position, etc. of each component provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above are merely examples, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be realized with other shapes, numbers, and installation positions without departing from the scope of the present invention.Furthermore, it goes without saying that the numerical values used in the above-described processing are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized with other numerical values.

Although the present invention has been described in detail above using the embodiments, the above description is merely illustrative of the present invention in all respects and is not intended to limit its scope. It goes without saying that various improvements and modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. In addition, it should be understood that the terms used in this specification are used in the sense commonly used in the field unless otherwise specified. Therefore, unless otherwise defined, all technical terms and technical terms used in this specification have the same meaning as commonly understood by those skilled in the art to which this invention belongs. In the event of a conflict, this specification (including definitions) will take precedence.

1... gaming machine 9... speaker 16... performance button 18... cross key 43... normal winning port 45, 47... start port 44... gate 50, 56... big winning port 70, 71... image display unit (screen)
73... Movable parts

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player,
A determination means for making a determination ;
game control means for controlling the progress of a game and transmitting a predetermined command based on the result of the determination by the determination means;
A presentation control means for controlling a predetermined game presentation based on the predetermined command transmitted by the game control means;
A display means for displaying the game performance;
An operation means operated by a player,
The performance control means includes:
A display effect in which a specific image is displayed in a varying manner and then stopped is displayed on the display means,
The display means is capable of displaying an operation effect that prompts the user to operate the operation means and executing a predetermined emphasis effect that emphasizes the operation effect ,
A first specific notification that notifies a game method is executable,
A second specific notification regarding a performance effect can be executed,
The operation means is capable of executing a performance corresponding to the predetermined highlight performance,
When the first specific notification is executed during execution of the predetermined emphasis effect, the operation means is capable of executing an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect and is capable of restricting execution of the effect corresponding to the first specific notification ,
The display performance can be set in any one of a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode,
A sound generated during execution of the predetermined emphasis effect can be made different between when the first mode is set and when the second mode is set,
A gaming machine in which it is possible to make the notification sound regarding the second specific notification common when the first mode is set and when the second mode is set .

Images